Honda 2013 Pilot Owners Manual

Honda-2013-Pilot-Owners-Manual-762569 honda-2013-pilot-owners-manual-762569

Honda-2013-Pilot-Owners-Manual-106998 honda-2013-pilot-owners-manual-106998

Owners Manual Pdf ZA1313OM 2013 Honda Pilot Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

2015-10-23

: Honda Honda-2013-Honda-Pilot-Owners-Manual-816790 honda-2013-honda-pilot-owners-manual-816790 honda pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 486 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the

vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find

descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your

particular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)

represent features and equipment that are available on some, but

not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these

features.

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and

Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were

in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications

or design at any time without notice and without incurring any

obligation.

2Safe Driving P. 23

For Safe Driving P. 24 Seat Belts P. 29 Airbags P. 37

2Instrument Panel P. 67

Indicators P. 68 Gauges and Displays P. 80

2Controls P. 97

Setting the Clock P. 98 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 99

Opening and Closing the Moonroof* P. 123

Adjusting the Seats P. 137

2Features P. 171

Audio System P. 172 Audio System Basic Operation P. 216

General Information on the Audio System P. 272

Compass* P. 320

2Driving P. 323

Before Driving P. 324 Towing a Trailer P. 329

Parking Your Vehicle P. 364 Rearview Camera* P. 369

Accessories and Modifications P. 375

2Maintenance P. 377

Before Performing Maintenance P. 378 Maintenance Minder™ P. 381

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 410

Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care* P. 425

2Handling the Unexpected P. 433

Tools P. 434 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 435

Overheating P. 448 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 450

2Information P. 463

Specifications P. 464 Identification Numbers P. 466

Emissions Testing P. 470 Warranty Coverages P. 472

Gracenote® End User License Agreement P. 476

QRG Quick Reference Guide

Index Index

Home Book Table of Contents

TOC Chapter Table of Contents

Navigation Key

2013 Pilot

Online Reference Owner's Manual

00X31-SZA-64000

* Not available on all models

Contents

Child Safety P. 52 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 65 Safety Labels P. 66

Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 110 Security System P. 118 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 120

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 124 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 135

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 150 Climate Control System P. 165

Rear Entertainment System* P. 251 Audio Error Messages P. 266

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver* P. 276 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 278

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 340 When Driving P. 342 Braking P. 360

Multi-View Rear Camera* P. 370 Refueling P. 371 Fuel Economy P. 374

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 389 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 402

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 414 Battery P. 423 Remote Transmitter Care P. 424

Climate Control System Maintenance P. 427 Cleaning P. 428

Engine Does Not Start P. 444 Jump Starting P. 445 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 447

Fuses P. 454 Emergency Towing P. 459 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 461

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 467 Reporting Safety Defects P. 469

Authorized Manuals P. 474 Customer Service Information P. 475

Quick Reference Guide P. 2

Safe Driving P. 23

Instrument Panel P. 67

Controls P. 97

Features P. 171

Driving P. 323

Maintenance P. 377

Handling the Unexpected P. 433

Information P. 463

Index P. 478

2013 Pilot

* Not available on all models

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

❙Steering Wheel Adjustments

(P134)

❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)

System OFF) Button (P352)

❙Gauges (P 80)

❙Information Display* (P81)

❙System Indicators (P68)

❙Multi-Information Display* (P85)

❙Hazard Warning Button

❙Audio System (P172)

❙Navigation System*

() See Navigation System Manual

❙Climate Control System (P165)

❙Rear Window Defogger (P131)

❙Heated Mirror Button* (P131)

❙Ignition Switch (P124)

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P81)

❙Headlights/Turn Signals (P125)

❙Fog Lights* (P127)

❙Brightness Control (P130)

❙Cruise Control Buttons (P348)

❙Wipers/Washers (P128)

❙Horn (Press an area around .)

❙SEL/RESET Button* (P81)

❙ / (Information) Button* (P85)

❙Navigation System Voice Control Buttons*

() See Navigation System Manual

❙Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System

Voice Control Buttons (P301)

❙Remote Audio Control Buttons (P184)

* Not available on all models

(P217)

Home

QRG

Index

Visual Index

Quick Reference Guide -2013 Pilot

❙Power Door Lock Master Switch (P103)

❙Power Window Switches (P120)

❙Rearview Mirror (P135)

❙Hood Release Handle (P390)

❙Glove Box (P 152)

❙Driver's Front Airbag (P40)

❙Door Mirror Controls (P136)

❙Passenger's Front Airbag

(P40)

❙Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P372)

❙Parking Brake Release Handle (P360)

❙Shift Lever

Automatic Transmission

(P345)

❙Accessory Power Socket

(P156)

❙Interior Fuse Box (P456)

❙Seat Heater Switches* (P162)

❙Parking Brake (P360)

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

❙Sun Visors

❙Vanity Mirrors

❙Moonroof Switch* (P123)

❙Map Lights (P151)

❙Sunglasses Holder (P161)

❙HomeLinkr Button (P276)

❙Side Curtain Airbags (P47)

❙Seat Belts (P29)

❙Grab Handle

❙Coat Hook (P159)

❙Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P60)

❙Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P61)

❙Accessory Power Socket (P156)

❙USB Adapter Cable (P173)

❙Auxiliary Input Jack (P173)

❙Accessory Power Socket (P157)

❙Third Row Seat (P57)

❙Second Row Seat (P146)

❙Front Seat (P137)

❙Side Airbags (P44)

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Visual Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

❙Windshield Wipers (P128)

❙Door Lock/Unlock Control (P101)

❙How to Refuel (P372)

❙High-Mount Brake Light (P409)

❙Opening/Closing the Tailgate

(P110)

❙Rear Wiper (P129)

❙Back-Up Lights (P406)

❙Brake/Taillights (P406)

❙Rear Turn Signal Lights (P406)

❙Rear Side Marker Lights (P406)

❙Power Door Mirrors (P136)

❙Maintenance Under the Hood (P389)

❙Fog Lights

*(P127)

❙Rearview Camera* (P369)

❙Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P125)

❙Side Marker Lights (P125)

❙Tires (P414)

❙Headlights (P125)

❙Tailgate Release Button (P111)

* Not available on all models

(P410)

(P402)

(P405)

(P410)

(P435)

(P403)

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Safe Driving (P 23)

Airbags (P37)

●Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and

your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P52)

●All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.

●Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.

●Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P65)

●Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon

monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon

monoxide gas can accumulate.

Before Driving Checklist (P28)

●Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,

steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Seat Belts (P29)

●Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well

back in the seat.

●Check that your passengers are wearing

their seat belts correctly.

Fasten your lap belt as

low as possible.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Instrument Panel (P 67)

System Indicators

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

Charging System

Indicator

Daytime Running

Lights Indicator*

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) System Indicator

VSA® OFF Indicator

Low Tire Pressure

Indicator*/Low Tire

Pressure/TPMS

Indicator*

Lights Reminders

Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator*

Immobilizer System

Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder

Indicator

System Indicators

CRUISE CONTROL

Indicator

Parking Brake and

Brake System Indicator

Supplemental

Restraint System

Indicator

Side Airbag Off

Indicator

Door Open Indicator

CRUISE MAIN Indicator

Tachometer

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Low Fuel Indicator

Shift Lever Position Indicator

System Message

Indicator*

Gauges (P80)/Information Display* (P81)/

Multi-Information Display* (P85)/System Indicators (P68)

Fuel Economy Indicator

VTM-4r system Indicator*TPMS Indicator*

Maintenance

Minder Indicator*

Washer Level

Indicator*

A/T Temperature

Indicator*

Turn Signal and

Hazard Warning

Indicators

Starter System

Indicator*

System Indicators

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Indicator

Power Tailgate Indicator*

Security System Alarm

Indicator*

Information Display*/

Multi-Information Display*

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Controls (P97)

Clock (P 98)

aPress the CLOCK button to access the

clock adjustment mode screen.

bPress to select the item you want to

adjust (12/24 hour mode, hour,

minutes).

cRotate to make the adjustment.

dPress to enter your selection. Repeat

steps 2 to 4 to adjust other items.

eTo enter the selection, press and

select EXIT, then press .

The navigation system receives signals

from GPS satellites, updating the

clock automatically.

Models without navigation system

Models with navigation system

Turn Signals (P125)

Turn Signal Control Lever

Right

Left

Lights (P125)

Light Control Switches

Low Beam

High Beam

Flashing

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Wipers and Washers

(P128)

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

Adjustment Ring

: Long Delay

: Short Delay

MIST

OFF

INT: Low speed with intermittent

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward

you to spray

washer fluid.

Steering Wheel (P134)

●To adjust, pull the adjustment lever

towards you, adjust to the desired

position, then lock the lever back in place.

Tailgate (P110)

●With all the doors unlocked, press

the tailgate release button and lift

open the tailgate.

●Press the power tailgate button on the

driver’s door or the remote transmitter to

open and close the power tailgate.

Glass Hatch (P116)

●To open the glass hatch, press the glass

hatch release button on the tailgate.

●Press the glass hatch release button on

the driver’s door or the remote

transmitter to open the glass hatch.

Models with the power tailgate

Models without the power tailgate

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Power Door Mirrors

(P136)

●With the ignition switch in ON (w, move

the selector switch to L or R.

●Push the appropriate edge of the

adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.

●Place the selector switch in the L or R

position to use the reverse tilt door

mirror feature.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows (P120)

●With the ignition switch in ON (w, open

and close the power windows.

●If the power window lock button is in

the off position, each passenger's

window can be opened and closed with

its own switch.

●If the power window lock button is in the

on position (indicator is on), each

passenger's window switch is disabled.

Power Window Lock Button

Window

Switch

Indicator

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Climate Control System (P165)

●Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.

●Press the button to turn the system on or off.

●Press the button to defrost the windshield.

The climate control system is voice operable. See the navigation system manual for complete

details.

Models with navigation system

Fan Control Bar

(Rear Window

Defogger/Heated

Mirror*) Button

(Windshield

Defroster) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning)

Button

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and

dashboard vents.

Air flows from dashboard

vents.

(Recirculation) Button

Passenger’s

Side

Temperature

Control Dial

AUTO Button

Driver’s Side

Temperature

Control Dial

MODE Control Button

SYNC (Synchronized) Button

(On/Off) Button

Rear Climate Control

●Press the AUTO button to activate the

rear climate control system.

●Press the OFF button repeatedly to turn

the system off.

Rear Passenger

Compartment

Temperature

Control Bar Fan Control Bar

Airflows

from the

rear floor

vents

Airflow is

divided

between the

rear floor

vents and

rear ceiling

vents.

Airflows

from the

rear ceiling

vents

OFF Button

AUTO Button

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Features (P171)

Audio System (P172)

SCAN Button

SKIP Bar

Interface Dial*

HDD Button

VOL/ (Volume/

Power) Knob

USB/AUX Button

CD Slot

(CD Eject) Button

Preset Buttons (1-6)

PHONE Button

Button*

FM/AM Button*

AUDIO Button*

CD Button

●Audio Remote Controls (P184)

●VOL (Volume) Button

Press and release to adjust the volume up/

down.

●MODE Button

Press and release to change the audio

mode: FM1/FM2/AM/XM1*/XM2*/CD/

CD-L*/HDD*/AUX.

●CH (Channel) Button

Radio:Press and release to change the

preset station.

Press and hold to select the next or

previous strong station.

CD/CD Library*/HDD*/USB device:

Press and release to skip to the

beginning of the next song or

return to the beginning of the

current song.

Press and hold to change a folder.

VOL Button

MODE Button

CH Button

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Driving (P323)

Release Button Shift Lever

Depress the brake pedal and press the

release button to move out of (P.

Move the shift lever without

pressing the release button.

Press the release button to

move the shift lever.

Automatic Transmission (P346)

●Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.

●Shifting

Park

Turn off or start the engine.

Transmission is locked.

Reverse

Neutral

Transmission is not locked.

Drive

Normal driving.

Drive (D3)

Press the (d button while the shift lever is in

(D.

Used when:

•Going up or down hills

•Towing a trailer in hilly terrain

Second

Used to increase engine braking (the

transmission is locked in 2nd gear)

First

Used to further increase engine braking

(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)

(d Button

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

VSA® OFF Button (P353)

●The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system

helps stabilize the vehicle during

cornering, and helps maintain traction

while accelerating on loose or slippery

road surfaces.

●VSA® comes on automatically every time

you start the engine.

●To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold

the button until you hear a beep.

Cruise Control (P348)

●Cruise control allows you to maintain a

set speed without keeping your foot on

the accelerator pedal.

●To use cruise control, press the CRUISE

button, then press DECEL/SET button

once you have achieved the desired speed

(above 25 mph or 40 km/h).

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) (P355)

●TPMS monitors tire pressure.

●TPMS is turned on automatically every

time you start the engine.

Refueling (P371)

aPull the fuel fill door

release handle.

bTurn the fuel fill cap

slowly to remove the

cap.

cPlace the cap in the

holder on the fuel fill

door.

dAfter refueling, screw

the cap back on until it

clicks at least once.

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or

higher required

Fuel tank capacity: 21 US gal (79.5 L)

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Maintenance (P377)

Under the Hood (P389)

●Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer

fluid. Add when necessary.

●Check brake fluid.

●Check the battery condition monthly.

aPull the hood release handle under the corner of

the dashboard.

bLocate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up

the hood.

cWhen finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly

locked in place.

Lights (P402)

●Inspect all lights regularly.

Wiper Blades (P410)

●Replace blades if they leave

streaks across the windshield.

Tires (P414)

●Inspect tires and wheels regularly.

●Check tire pressures regularly.

●Install snow tires for winter driving.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Handling the Unexpected (P433)

Flat Tire (P435)

●Park in a safe location and replace the

flat tire with the compact spare tire in the

cargo area.

Indicators Come On

(P450)

●Identify the indicator and consult the

owner's manual.

Engine Won't Start (P444)

●If the battery is dead, jump start using a

booster battery.

Blown Fuse (P454)

●Check for a blown fuse if an electrical

device does not operate.

Overheating (P448)

●Park in a safe location. If you do not see

steam under the hood, open the hood,

and let the engine cool down.

Emergency Towing (P459)

●Call a professional towing service if you

need to tow your vehicle.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

What to Do If

The ignition switch does

not turn from (0 to (q.

Why?

●The steering wheel may be locked.

●Try to turn the steering wheel left and right

while turning the ignition key.

The ignition switch does

not turn from (q to (0 and

I cannot remove the key.

Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P.

Why does the brake pedal

pulsate slightly when

applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a

problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never

pump the brake pedal.

The rear door cannot be

opened from inside the

vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the

lock position. If so, open the rear

door with the outside door handle.

To cancel this function, push the

lever to the unlock position.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

Why do the doors lock

after I unlocked the doors

using a remote

transmitter?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are

relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper

sound when I open the

driver's door?

The beeper sounds when:

●The key is left in the ignition switch.

●The exterior lights are left on.

Why does the beeper

sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when:

●Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.

●The parking brake lever is not fully released.

Why do I hear a screeching

sound when I apply the

brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

California Proposition 65 Warning

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s

systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related

to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator

and/or brake pedal; and,

•How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the

circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and

crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

WARNING: This product contains or emits

chemicals known to the state of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other reproductive

harm.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,

and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that

have the special equipment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by

anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the

vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record

information about powertrain performance. The data can be used

to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians

diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with

data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains

confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this

vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may

apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded

by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid

damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

NOTICE

Home

QRG

Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Pilot

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And

operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have

provided operating procedures and other information on labels and

in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that

could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the

hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You

must use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of

forms, including:

●Safety Labels - on the vehicle.

●Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and

one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.

These signal words mean:

●Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.

●Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.

●Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please

read it carefully.

3DANGER

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

you don't follow instructions.

3WARNING

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

you don't follow instructions.

3CAUTION

You CAN be HURT if you don't follow

instructions.

Home

QRG

Index

Home

QRG

Index

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions ............. 24

Important Handling Information......... 26

Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 27

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts........................ 29

Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 32

Seat Belt Inspection............................ 36

Airbags

Airbag System Components............... 37

Types of Airbags ................................ 40

Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 40

Side Airbags ...................................... 44

Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 47

Airbag System Indicators.................... 48

Airbag Care ....................................... 51

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers ............... 52

Safety of Infants and Small Children .......54

Safety of Larger Children ................... 63

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 65

Safety Labels

Label Locations .................................. 66 Home

QRG

Index

Safe Driving

For Safe Driving

The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them

properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the

most important.

Important Safety Precautions

■Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to

supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped

with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and

wear them properly.

■Restrain all children

Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the

front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger

children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the

belt properly without a booster seat.

■Be aware of airbag hazards

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants

who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,

and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and

warnings in this manual.

■Don't drink and drive

Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to

changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.

So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use

of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the

driver while driving.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

Safe Driving

■Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely

Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying

close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.

Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to

divert some attention away from driving.

■Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher

the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.

Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum

speed posted.

■Keep your vehicle in safe condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition

frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information

Safe Driving

Important Handling Information

Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use

only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway

driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also

provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher

off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tripping

or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is

significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,

make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.

1Important Handling Information

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover,

read:

2Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

P. 344

2Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 340

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result

in a crash or a rollover.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuFor Safe Driving uYour Vehicle's Safety Features

Continued

Safe Driving

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and

your passengers.

1Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that

work together to help protect you and your

passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part.

These include a strong steel framework that forms a

safety cage around the passenger compartment,

front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering

column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat

belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full

advantage of these features unless you remain seated

in the correct position and always wear your seat

belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to

injuries if they are not used properly.

Safety Cage

Crush Zones

Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column

Seat Belts

Front Airbags

Side Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

Door Locks

Seat Belt Tensioners

Occupant Position Detection

System (OPDS) Sensor

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

Safe Driving

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items

each time before you drive.

•After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are

closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant

from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the

tailgate.

2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 103

•Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are

adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the

vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a

crash.

2Adjusting the Seats P. 137

•Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective

when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller

persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.

2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 141

•Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any

passengers are properly belted as well.

2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 32

•Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height

and weight.

2Child Safety P. 52

■Safety Checklist

1Safety Checklist

If the door and/or the tailgate open indicator is on, a

door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed.

Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the

indicator goes off.

2Door Open Indicator P. 72

2Door, Glass Hatch, and Tailgate Open

Indicator* P. 72

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued

Safe Driving

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you

connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety

features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the

vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat

belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full

advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

-frontal impacts

-side impacts

-rear impacts

-rollovers

■Lap/shoulder seat belts

All eight seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency

locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping

some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to

restrain your body. The second and third row passenger’s seat belts also have a

lockable retractor for use with child seats.

2Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 60

1About Your Seat Belts

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every

crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your

risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories

require you to wear seat belts.

WARNING

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases

the chance of serious injury or death in a

crash, even though your vehicle has

airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always

wear seat belts and wear them properly.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

■Proper use of seat belts

Follow these guidelines for proper use:

•All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position

for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of

the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

•Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or

behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

•Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very

seriously injured in a crash.

•Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort

or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability

and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If

the ignition switch is turned to ON (w before

the driver's seat belt is fastened, a beeper will

sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver

does not fasten the belt before the beeper

stops, the indicator will remain on.

The beeper will also periodically sound and

the indicator will blink while driving until the

driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are

fastened.

■Seat Belt Reminder

1About Your Seat Belts

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends

the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If

this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the

seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.

Then refasten the belt.

1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger

does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after

the ignition switch is turned to ON (w.

When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,

or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator

will not come on.

This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot

detect their presence.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-

severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to

inflate the front airbags.

■Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.

If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come

on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and

thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not

offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the

tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

Fastening a Seat Belt

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well

back in the seat:

2Adjusting the Seats P. 137

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then

tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is

secure.

uMake sure that the belt is not twisted or

caught on anything.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat

belt or one that does not appear to be working

correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working

properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.

Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or

retractor mechanism.

Pull out slowly.

Correct

Seated

Posture.

Latch

Plate

Buckle

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 33

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as

possible across your hips, then pull up on

the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part

fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic

bones take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to

remove any slack, then check that the belt

rests across the center of your chest and

over your shoulder. This spreads the forces

of a crash over the strongest bones in your

upper body.

The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and

1. Move the anchor up and down while

holding the release button.

2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests

across the center of your chest and over

your shoulder.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then

guide the belt by hand until it has retracted

completely.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of

the way and will not get caught by closing the door.

WARNING

Improperly positioning the seat belts can

cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly

positioned before driving.

Lap belt

as low as

possible

■Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four

levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height

one level at a time.

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder

anchor position is secure.

Push

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

shorter occupants.

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and

the latch plate from each holding slot in the

ceiling.

2. Line up the triangle marks on the small

latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure

the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt

to the anchor buckle.

3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle.

Properly fasten the seat belt the same way

you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.

■Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch

plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.

WARNING

Using the seat belt with the detachable

anchor unlatched increases the chance of

serious injury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt, make sure the

detachable anchor is correctly latched.

Small Latch Plate

Latch Plate

Small Latch Plate

Latch Plate

Small Latch Plate

Anchor Buckle

Latch

Plate

Buckle

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when

driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the

belt as low as possible across the hips.

■Advice for Pregnant Women

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is

okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your

unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front

airbag:

•When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far

back as possible while allowing full control of the

vehicle.

•When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust

the seat as far back as possible.

Wear the shoulder belt

across the chest avoiding

the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible

across the hips.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Safe Driving

Seat Belt Inspection

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

•Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.

•Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.

uIf a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only

use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make

sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper

protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of

protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after

any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

WARNING

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can

result in serious injury or death if the seat

belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have

any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued

Safe Driving

Airbags

Airbag System Components

11 12 2

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Safe Driving

The front, front side, and side curtain

airbags are deployed according to the

direction and severity of impact. The airbag

system includes:

aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored

in the center of the steering wheel; the

front passenger's airbag is stored in the

dashboard. Both are marked SRS

AIRBAG.

bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and

one for a front passenger. The airbags are

stored in the outer edges of the seat-

backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each

side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored

in the ceiling, above the side windows.

The front and rear pillars are marked

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

dAn electronic control unit that continually

monitors and records information about

the sensors, the airbag activators, the

seat belt tensioners, and driver and front

passenger seat belt use when the ignition

switch is in ON (w.

eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. The

driver's and front passenger's seat belts

incorporate sensors that detect whether

or not they are fastened.

fA driver's seat position sensor. If the seat

is too far forward, the airbag will inflate

with less force.

gWeight sensors in the front passenger's

seat. The front passenger's airbag will be

turned off if the weight on the seat is 65

lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant

or small child).

hImpact sensors that can detect a

moderate to severe front impact, side

impact, or if your vehicle is about to

rollover.

iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts

you that the front passenger's front

airbag has been turned off.

jSensors that can detect if a child or small

statured adult is in the deployment path

of the front passenger's side airbag.

kAn indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you to a possible problem with your

airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

lAn indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you that the front passenger's side

airbag has been turned off.

mSafing Sensor

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Safe Driving

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with

tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,

and other minor injuries, and sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not

wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and

as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the

vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard

as possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that

can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the

airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp

object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the

covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags

or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

■Important Facts About Your Airbags

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,

airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the

deployment path of the front airbag by holding each

side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over

the airbag cover.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Safe Driving

Types of Airbags

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:

•Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.

•Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.

•Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.

Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS)

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect

the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to

supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary

restraint system.

The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and

in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

■Housing Locations

1Types of Airbags

The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch

is in ON (w.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags

(SRS)

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-

threshold front airbags (SRS).

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or

both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate

at different rates, depending on the severity of the

crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/

or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to

supplement the seat belts to help reduce the

likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal

crashes.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 41

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe Driving

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.

When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control

unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a

vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the

front airbag provides supplemental protection

for your head and chest.

The front airbags deflate immediately so that

they won't interfere with the driver's visibility

or the ability to steer or operate other

controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not

aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

■Operation

■How the Front Airbags Work

1How the Front Airbags Work

After a front airbag inflates in a crash, you may see

what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from

the airbag's surface. Although the powder is not

harmful, people with respiratory problems may

experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs,

get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags

normally inflate within a split second of each other, it

is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can

happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,

or threshold, that determines whether or not the

airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will

provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental

protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe Driving

■When front airbags should not deploy

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and

help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur

during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration

causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side

airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the

severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which

can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.

Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear

impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed

to deploy in such collisions.

Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags

and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags

could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during

■When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the

vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.

Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object

that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is

underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

■When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage

appears severe

Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of

visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some

collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags

would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they

had deployed.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

a rollover.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe Driving

Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag

related injuries to smaller occupants.

The driver's advanced front airbag system

includes a seat position sensor.

If the seat is too far forward, the airbag

inflates with less force, regardless of the

severity of the impact.

The passenger's advanced front airbag system

has weight sensors.

Although Honda recommends against

carrying an infant or small child in front, if

the sensors detect the weight of a child (up

to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will

automatically turn off the passenger's

front airbag.

■Advanced Airbags

1Advanced Airbags

If there is a problem with the driver's seat position

sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag

will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the

driver's seating position.

For both advanced front airbags to work properly:

•Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.

•Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.

•Make sure any objects are positioned properly on

the floor. Improperly positioned objects can

interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

•All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat

belts properly.

•Do not place any cover over the passenger side

dashboard.

Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger's

seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly

placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag

sensors.

2Floor Mats P. 429

Driver’s

Seat

Position

Sensor

Passenger’s

Seat

Weight

Sensors

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Safe Driving

Side Airbags

The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger

during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

The side airbags are housed in the outside

edge of the driver's and passenger's seat-

backs.

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

When the sensors detect a moderate-to-

severe side impact, the control unit signals the

side airbag on the impact side to immediately

inflate.

■Housing Locations

1Side Airbags

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.

They can interfere with the proper operation of the

airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

If the impact is on the passenger's side, the airbag

may not deploy when there is no passenger in the

front passenger seat.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers

without consulting a dealer.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back

covers can prevent your side airbags from properly

deploying during a side impact.

Housing

Location

■Operation

When

inflated

Side

Airbag

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Continued

Safe Driving

■When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side

of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there

may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough

impact to deploy the airbag.

■When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears

severe

It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in

apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards

the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts

absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have

been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Safe Driving

To reduce the likelihood that a front passenger may be injured by an inflating side

airbag, the passenger side airbag is automatically turned off when:

•The height sensors detect a child or short-statured adult is seated in the front

passenger seat.

•The position sensor detects that the front passenger is leaning into the

deployment path of the side airbag.

When the side airbag cutoff system is activated, the side airbag off indicator

comes on.

2Side Airbag Off Indicator P. 50

If the side airbag off indicator comes on, have the passenger sit upright. A few

seconds after the passenger is sitting properly, the side airbag will automatically be

turned on, and the indicator will go off.

If the front passenger is a child, stop when it is safe to do so, and have the child sit

properly restrained in a rear seat.

■Side Airbag Cutoff System

■Side Airbag Off Indicator

1Side Airbag Cutoff System

The sensors that monitor the front passenger's height

and body position may not work if:

•The seat-back is wet

•The passenger is touching a metal or other

electrical conductive object

•A seat cushion is on the seat

•The passenger is wearing excessively thick clothing

Sensor that

monitors the

passenger’s height.

Sensor that monitors the

passenger’s position.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Safe Driving

Side Curtain Airbags

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer

seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

The side curtain airbags are located in the

ceiling above the side windows on both sides

of the vehicle.

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy

in a moderate-to-severe side impact.

■When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision

One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate to severe angled

frontal collision.

In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.

■Housing Locations

1Side Curtain Airbags

The side curtain airbags are most effective when an

occupant is wearing their seat belt properly and

sitting upright, well back in their seat.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof

pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation

of the side curtain airbags.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

■Operation

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

Airbag System Indicators

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a

message appears on the multi-information display*.

■When the ignition switch is turned to

ON (w

The indicator comes on for a few seconds,

then goes off. This tells you the system is

working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the

system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat

belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

■SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator

1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator

WARNING

Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in

serious injury or death if the airbag systems

or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as

soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts

you to a possible problem.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 49

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

■When the passenger airbag off

indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the

passenger's front airbag has been turned off.

This occurs when the front passenger’s weight

sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the

weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.

Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.

2Child Safety P. 52

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and

the indicator will not come on.

■Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and

no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult

riding there, something may be interfering with the

weight sensors. Such as:

•An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back

pocket.

•A child seat or other object pressing against the

rear of the seat-back.

•A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of

the front passenger's seat.

•The front seat or seat-back is forced back against

an object on the seat or floor behind it.

•An object placed under the front passenger's seat.

If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and

goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is

near the airbag cutoff threshold.

U.S. Canada

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

■When the side airbag off indicator comes on

This indicator comes on if the passenger's side airbag has been turned off because

the passenger is too small to be sitting in the front seat, is slouching or not sitting

upright, or has leaned into the airbag's deployment path.

Unless the passenger is a smaller statured adult or a child, the indicator should go

off when the passenger returns to a proper upright sitting position.

■Side Airbag Off Indicator

1Side Airbag Off Indicator

When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the

indicator should come on for a few seconds and then

go out. If it doesn't come on, stays on, or comes on

while driving without a passenger in the front seat,

have the system checked by a dealer as soon as

possible.

Canada

U.S.

U.S. Canada

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Safe Driving

Airbag Care

You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any

airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

■When the airbags have deployed

If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be

replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it

must be replaced.

■When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision

Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s

seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt

tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

■Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer

This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the passenger’s weight

sensors. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person

with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda

Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda

Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.

1Airbag Care

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag

system components, including the airbag, tensioners,

sensors, and control unit.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Safe Driving

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are

either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the

number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province

and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride

in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:

•An inflating front or side airbag can injure

or kill a child sitting in the front seat.

•A child in the front seat is more likely to

interfere with the driver's ability to safely

control the vehicle.

•Statistics show that children of all sizes and

ages are safer when they are properly

restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport Canada recommend

that all children age 12 and under be properly

restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/

territories have laws restricting where children may

ride.

WARNING

Children who are unrestrained or

improperly restrained can be seriously

injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be

properly restrained in a child seat. A larger

child should be properly restrained with a

seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

Safe Driving

•Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an

approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt

portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

•Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the

event of a collision.

•Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would

likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

•Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very

seriously injured in a crash.

•Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.

•Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when

the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate

vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

1Protecting Child Passengers

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle

and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passenger's front airbag

hazards and child safety, your vehicle warning came

with a label on the dashboard (U.S. models) and has

labels on the front visors. Please read and follow the

instructions on these labels.

2Safety Labels P. 66

WARNING

Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or

wrap one around their neck can result in

serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat

belt and make sure any unused seat belt a

child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,

and locked.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

Safety of Infants and Small Children

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the

infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is

at least one year old.

■Positioning a rear-facing child seat

Child seats must be placed and secured in a

rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front

passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back

in the desired position.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front

airbag system.

2Airbags P. 37

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front

passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.

Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

■Protecting Infants

1Protecting Infants

Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a

forward facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions before installation.

WARNING

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front

seat can result in serious injury or death

during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the

rear seat, not the front.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 55

uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child

seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured

forward-facing child seat.

■Forward-facing child seat placement

We strongly recommend placing a forward-

facing child seat in a rear seating position.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with

advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A

rear seat is the safest place for a child.

■Protecting Smaller Children

1Protecting Smaller Children

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations

regarding child seat use where you are driving, and

follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat

up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are

appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

WARNING

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the

front seat can result in serious injury or

death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child

seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far

back as possible, and properly restrain the

child.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).

Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both

are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be

installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat

manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.

Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible

child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.

This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured

with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat

manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat

once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual

for proper installation instructions.

■Important consideration when selecting a child seat

Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:

•The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.

•The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.

•The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

■Selecting a Child Seat

1Selecting a Child Seat

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is

simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed

to simplify the installation process and reduce the

likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children

Continued

Safe Driving

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in each of the second row seats, and

the passenger's side third row seat. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors

with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.

1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

■Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Marks

Second row seat

Marks

Third row seat

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then

attach the child seat to the lower anchors

according to the instructions that came

with the child seat.

uWhen installing the child seat, make

sure that the lower anchors are not

obstructed by the seat belt or any

other object.

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

For your child's safety, when using a child seat

installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the

seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat

that is not properly secured will not adequately

protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the

child or other vehicle occupants.

Rigid Type

Lower

Anchors

Flexible

Type

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children

Continued

Safe Driving

3. Put the head restraint to its upper-most

position, then route the tether strap

between the head restraint legs, and secure

the tether strap hook onto the anchor.

4. Go to step 6.

3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest

position.

4. Route the tether strap over the head

restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

5. Secure the tether strap hook onto

the anchor.

6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat maker.

7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by

rocking it forward and back and side to

side; little movement should be felt.

8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child

can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor

is activated, and the belt is fully retracted

and locked.

Tether

Strap

Hook

Anchor

Outer position

Tether

Strap

Hook

Anchor

Center position

All models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.

2. Route the seat belt through the child seat

according to the seat maker's instructions,

and insert the latch plate into the buckle.

uInsert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the

lockable retractor.

4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into

the retractor, then try to pull it out to make

sure the retractor is locked.

uIf you are able to pull the shoulder belt

out, the lockable retractor is not

activated. Pull the seat belt all the way

out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.

5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near

the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack

from the lap part of the belt.

uWhen doing this, place your weight

on the child seat and push it into the

vehicle seat.

■Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

A child seat that is not properly secured will not

adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause

injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 61

uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by

rocking it forward and back and side to

side; little movement should be felt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child

can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor

is activated, and the belt is fully retracted

and locked.

A tether anchorage point is provided behind

each second and third row seating position. A

child seat that is installed with a seat belt and

comes with a tether can use the tether for

additional security.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle

and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

■Adding Security with a Tether

Tether Anchorage Points

Anchor Fitting

Tether Anchorage Points

Anchor Fitting

1Adding Security with a Tether

Since a tether can provide additional security to the

lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend

using a tether whenever one is available.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

■Using an outer anchor

1. Put the head restraint to its upper-most

position, then route the tether strap

through the head restraint legs. Make sure

the strap is not twisted.

2. Secure the tether strap hook onto the

anchor.

3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

■Using the center anchor

1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest

position.

2. Route the tether strap over the head

restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the

anchor.

4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

Tether

Strap

Hook

Anchor

Tether

Strap

Hook

Anchor

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Continued

Safe Driving

Safety of Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind

of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who

must sit in front.

When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/

shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the

following questions.

■Checklist

•Do the child's knees bend comfortably over

the edge of the seat?

•Does the shoulder belt cross between the

child's neck and arm?

•Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the child's thighs?

•Will the child be able to stay seated like this

for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder

seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a

booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

■Protecting Larger Children

■Checking Seat Belt Fit

1Safety of Larger Children

WARNING

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in

front can result in injury or death if the

passenger's front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the

vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,

have the child sit up properly and wear the

seat belt properly, using a booster seat if

needed.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safe Driving

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used

properly, position the child in a booster seat in

a rear seating position. For the child's safety,

check that the child meets the booster seat

manufacturer's recommendations.

Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever

have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

•Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information

in this manual.

•Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.

•Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.

•Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in

the seat.

■Monitoring child passengers

We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older,

more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts

and sit up properly.

■Booster Seats

1Booster Seats

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the

instructions that came with it, and install the seat

accordingly.

There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a

booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat

belt correctly.

Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and

territories require children to use a booster seat until

they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60

lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or

province, or territory where you intend to drive.

■Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Safe Driving

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas

The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,

odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon

monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

■Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever

•The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.

•The exhaust system may have been damaged.

•The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into

the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate

open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

1. Select the fresh air mode.

2. Select the mode.

3. Set the fan speed to high.

4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked

vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up

with carbon monoxide gas.

Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.

Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the

garage immediately after starting the engine.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and

even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that

expose you to carbon monoxide.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Safe Driving

Safety Labels

Label Locations

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these

labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer

for a replacement.

Sun Visor

U.S. models

Canadian models

Radiator Cap

U.S. models

U.S. models only

Dashboard

Canadian models

Doorjambs

U.S. models only

Sun Visor

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 68

Multi-Information Display Warning and

Information Messages*.................... 78

Gauges and Displays

Gauges.............................................. 80

Information Display*.......................... 81

Multi-Information Display*................. 85

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Instrument Panel

Indicators

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Parking Brake

and Brake

System Indicator

(Red)

●Comes on for a few seconds

when you turn the ignition

switch to ON (w, then goes

off.

●Comes on when the parking

brake is applied, and goes off

when it is released.

●Comes on when the brake

fluid level is low.

●Comes on if there is a

problem with the brake

system.

●The beeper sounds and the

indicator comes on if you

drive with the parking brake

not fully released.

●Comes on while driving -

Make sure the parking brake is

released. Check the brake fluid

level.

2What to do when the

indicator comes on while

driving P. 452

●Comes on along with the ABS

indicator - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

2If the Brake System

Indicator (Red) Comes On

P. 452

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

●Comes on when you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w, and

goes off when the engine

starts.

●Comes on when the engine

oil pressure is low.

●Comes on while driving -

Immediately stop in a safe place.

2If the Low Oil Pressure

Indicator Comes On P. 450

U.S.

Canada

U.S. Canada

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Malfunction

Indicator Lamp

●Comes on when you turn the ignition

switch to ON (w, and goes off either

when the engine starts or after

several seconds if the engine is not

started. If “readiness codes” have not

been set, it blinks five times before it

goes off.

●Comes on if there is a problem with

the emissions control system.

●Blinks when a misfire in the engine's

cylinders is detected.

●Readiness codes are part of the on board

diagnostics for the emissions control

systems.

2Testing of Readiness Codes P. 470

●Comes on while driving - Have the

vehicle checked by a dealer.

●Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe

place where there are no flammable

objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes

or more, and wait for it to cool down.

Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.

2If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Comes On or Blinks P. 451

Charging System

Indicator

●Comes on when you turn the ignition

switch to ON (w, and goes off when

the engine starts.

●Comes on when the battery is not

charging.

●Comes on while driving - Turn off the

climate control system and rear defogger

in order to reduce electricity

consumption.

2If the Charging System Indicator

Comes On P. 450

Shift Lever

Position

Indicator

●Indicates current shift lever position.

(d indicator:

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●Comes on when you press the (d

button while the shift lever is in (D.

2Shifting P. 346 —

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Transmission

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●Blinks if the transmission system has a

problem.

●Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden

starts and acceleration and have the

vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Seat Belt

Reminder

Indicator

●Comes on and the beeper sounds if

you are not wearing a seat belt when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w. If the front passenger is not

wearing a seat belt, the indicator

comes on a few seconds later.

●Blinks while driving if either you or

the front passenger has not fastened

a seat belt. The beeper sounds and

the indicator blinks at regular

intervals.

●The beeper stops and the indicator goes

off when you and the front passenger

fasten their seat belts.

●Stays on after you or the front

passenger has fastened the seat belt

- A detection error may have occurred in

the sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer.

2Seat Belt Reminder P. 30

Low Fuel

Indicator

●Comes on when the fuel reserve is

running low (approximately 2.8 U.S.

gal./10.8 Liter).

●Blinks if there is a problem with the

fuel gauge.

●Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon

as possible.

●Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System)

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●If it comes on at any other time, there

is a problem with the ABS.

●Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer. With this indicator

on, your vehicle still has normal braking

ability but no anti-lock function.

2ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 362

Supplemental

Restraint System

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●Comes on if a problem with any of

the following is detected:

-Supplemental restraint system

-Side airbag system

-Side curtain airbag system

-Seat belt tensioner

●Stays on constantly or does not come

on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer.

VTM-4® System

Indicator*

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●Comes on if there is a problem with

the VTM-4®.

●Blinks when the VTM-4® system is

overheated. The system is inactive.

●Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

●Blinks while driving - The VTM-4® fluid

temperature is too high. Stop in a safe

place, shift to (P, and idle the engine

until the indicator goes off. If the

indicator does not stop blinking, take

your vehicle to a dealer.

2VTM (Variable Torque

Management)-4r System* P. 354

—

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

VSA® (Vehicle

Stability Assist)

System Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●Blinks when VSA® is active.

●Comes on if there is a problem with

the VSA® system.

●Comes on if there is a problem with

the hill start assist system.

●Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

2VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka

ESC (Electronic Stability Control),

System P. 352

VSA® (Vehicle

Stability Assist)

OFF Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●Comes on when you deactivate

VSA®.

2VSA® On and Off P. 353 —

Door Open

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds if you

turn the ignition switch to ON (w,

then goes off.

●Comes on if any door, glass hatch, or

tailgate is not completely closed.

●Goes off when all doors, glass hatch, and

tailgate are closed.

Door, Glass

Hatch, and

Tailgate Open

Indicator*

●Comes on for a few seconds if you

turn the ignition switch to ON (w,

then goes off.

●Comes on if any door, glass hatch, or

tailgate is not completely closed.

●Goes off when all doors, glass hatch, and

tailgate are closed.

—

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Daytime

Running Lights

Indicator*

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●Comes on if there is a problem with

the DRL system.

●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2Daytime Running Lights P. 127

System Message

Indicator*

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●Comes on along with a beep when a

problem is detected. A system

message on the multi-information

display appears at the same time.

●While the indicator is on, press the /

(information) button to see the

message again.

●Refer to the Indicators information in this

chapter when a system message appears

on the multi-information display. Take

the appropriate action for the message.

●The multi-information display does not return

to the normal screen unless the warning is

canceled, or the / (information)

button is pressed.

—

A/T Temperature

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●Comes on when the transmission

fluid temperature is too high.

●Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe

place, shift to (P, and idle the engine

until the indicator goes off.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

TPMS Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w.

●Comes on if there is a problem with

the TPMS, or when a compact spare

tire is temporarily installed.

●Stays on constantly or does not come

on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a

compact spare, get your regular tire

repaired or replaced and put back on

your vehicle as soon as you can.

—

Low Tire

Pressure

Indicator

Low Tire

Pressure/TPMS

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w.

●Comes on if the tire pressure of any

of the tires becomes significantly low.

●Comes on for a while and then goes

off when a compact spare tire is

temporarily installed.

●Blinks for about one minute, and

then stays on if there is a problem

with the TPMS, or when a compact

spare tire is temporarily installed.

●Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe

place, check tire pressures, and inflate

the tire(s) if necessary.

●Blinks and remains on - Have the

vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle

is fitted with a compact spare, get your

regular tire repaired or replaced and put

back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Models with

information

display

Models with

information

display

Models with

multi-

information

display

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Turn Signal

Indicators

●The turn signal indicators blink when

you operate the turn signal lever.

●If you press the hazard warning

button, both indicators and all turn

signals blink at the same time.

●Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A

turn signal light bulb has blown. Change

the bulb immediately.

2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 404 P. 405

—

High Beam

Indicator

●Comes on when the high beam

headlights are on. ——

Lights On

Indicator

●Comes on whenever the light switch

is on, or in AUTO when the exterior

lights are on.

●If you remove the key from the ignition

switch while the lights are on, a chime

sounds when the driver's door is opened.

—

Fog Light

Indicator*

●Comes on when the fog lights are on. ——

Side Airbag Off

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w, then goes off.

●Comes on when the passenger side

airbag system is automatically shut

off.

●It does not mean there is a problem with

your side airbags.

●Comes on when nobody is sitting in

the passenger seat - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

●Comes on when someone is sitting in

the seat - Have the passenger sit

properly.

U.S.

Canada

* Not available on all models

P. 406

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Immobilizer

System Indicator

●Comes on briefly when you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w, then goes

off.

●Comes on if the immobilizer system

cannot recognize the key

information.

●Blinks - You cannot start the engine.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, pull

the key out, and then insert the key and

turn it to ON (w again.

●Repeatedly blinks - The system may be

malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked

by a dealer.

●Do not attempt to alter this system or add

other devices to it. Electrical problems

can occur.

—

Security System

Alarm Indicator*

●Blinks when the security system alarm

has been set. 2Security System Alarm* P. 118 —

Starter System

Indicator*

●Comes on if there is a problem with

the starter system.

●As a temporary measure, hold the

ignition switch to START (e for up to 15

seconds and start the engine. Have the

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Fuel Economy

Indicator

●Comes on and stays on while you are

driving with good fuel economy. ——

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

CRUISE MAIN

Indicator

●Comes on when you press the

CRUISE button. 2Cruise Control P. 348 —

CRUISE

CONTROL

Indicator

●Comes on if you have set a speed for

cruise control. 2Cruise Control P. 348 —

Washer Level

Indicator*

●Comes on when washer fluid is low.

●Refill washer fluid.

2Refilling Window Washer Fluid

P. 401

Maintenance

Minder

Indicator*

●Comes on when you turn the ignition

switch to ON (w, then goes off.

●Comes on when the scheduled

maintenance is due soon.

2Maintenance Minder™ P. 381 —

Power Tailgate

Indicator*

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w.

●Comes on if there is a problem with

the power tailgate system.

●Stays on constantly or does not come

on at all - You can still open or close the

tailgate manually. Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Instrument Panel

Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the / (information) button to see the message again

with the system message indicator on.

Message Condition Explanation

●Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not

installed. 2Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 451

●Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due

soon.

●Consequently, SERVICE DUE NOW and SERVICE

PAST DUE follow.

2Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-

Information Display P. 386

●Appears when you open the driver's door while the

ignition key is in LOCK (0.

●Remove the key from the ignition switch.

●Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets

abnormally high. 2Overheating P. 448

●Appears when the daytime running lights are off.

2Daytime Running Lights P. 127

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Instrument Panel

Message Condition Explanation

●Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor

system. The beeper sounds.

●Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with

mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even

after you clean the area, have the system checked by a

dealer.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

Instrument Panel

Gauges and Displays

Gauges

Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.

They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w.

Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

■Speedometer

■Tachometer

■Fuel Gauge

■Temperature Gauge

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches .

Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,

damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from

the fuel gauge reading.

1Temperature Gauge

NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the

upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull

safely to the side of the road and allow engine

temperature to return to normal.

2Overheating P. 448

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*

Continued

Instrument Panel

Information Display*

The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and

maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.

Press the (Select/Reset) knob to change the display.

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

■Switching the Display

■Odometer

Engine oil life

Trip meter B

Average fuel economy

Trip meter A

Instant fuel economy

Range (estimated distance)

Outside temperature*

Odometer

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*

Instrument Panel

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A

and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

■Resetting a trip meter

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is

reset to 0.0.

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100

km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the

average fuel economy is also reset.

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.

2Maintenance Minder™ P. 381

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is

estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.

■Trip Meter

■Instant Fuel Economy

■Average Fuel Economy

■Engine Oil Life

■Range

1Trip Meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by

pressing the knob.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*

Continued

Instrument Panel

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.

2Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 451

Shows each tire’s pressure.

2TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) P. 355

■Check Fuel Cap

■Tire Pressure Monitor

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*

Instrument Panel

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■Adjusting the outside temperature indicator

Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5ºF or ±3ºC if the temperature reading

seems incorrect.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

2. Press and hold the (Select/Reset) knob

for 10 seconds or more.

uThe information display shows the reset

mode initial display.

3. Select outside temperature with the

knob.

4. Press and hold the knob for a few

seconds to enter the outside temperature

setting mode.

5. Turn the knob to adjust the

temperature.

6. Press and release the knob.

uThe new outside temperature is now

entered.

■Outside Temperature*

1Outside Temperature*

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road

heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the

temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less

than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be

updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

1Adjusting the outside temperature indicator

Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5ºF or ±3ºC.

Reset Mode Initial Display

Oil life

Outside Temperature

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Continued

Instrument Panel

Multi-Information Display*

Shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as

warnings and other helpful information.

Press the / (information) button or the SEL/RESET button to change

the display.

■Switching the Display

SEL/RESET

Button

Tire Pressure Monitor

/ Button

Engine oil life Trip meter B

Trip meter A

Odometer

Customize Settings

Trip Computer

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Instrument Panel

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

■Odometer

Average Speed

Average fuel economyTrip Computer Instant fuel economy

SEL/RESET

Button

/ Button

Range

Elapsed Time

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

Continued 87

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Instrument Panel

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A

and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

■Resetting a trip meter

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip

meter is reset to 0.0.

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■Adjusting the outside temperature display

Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading

seems incorrect.

■Trip Meter

■Outside Temperature

1Trip Meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by

pressing the SEL/RESET button.

1Outside Temperature

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.

Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can

affect the temperature reading when your vehicle

speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be

updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

Use the multi-information display’s customized

features to correct the temperature.

2Customized Features P. 90

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Instrument Panel

Shows the instant fuel economy, average fuel economy, range, elapsed time, and

average speed.

■Instant Fuel Economy

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).

■Average Fuel Economy

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100

km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the

average fuel economy is also reset.

■Range

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is

estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.

■Elapsed Time

Shows the time elapsed since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.

■Average Speed

Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since the last time Trip A or Trip B was

reset.

Shows each tire's pressure.

2TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) P. 355

■Trip Computer

■Tire Pressure Monitor

1Average Fuel Economy

You can change when to reset the average fuel

economy.

2Customized Features P. 90

1Elapsed Time

You can change when to reset the elapsed time.

2Customized Features P. 90

1Average Speed

You can change when to reset the average speed.

2Customized Features P. 90

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Continued

Instrument Panel

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.

2Maintenance Minder™ P. 381

■Engine Oil Life

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Instrument Panel

Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.

■How to customize

Select the CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS by pressing the / button while the

ignition switch is in ON (w, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Press the SEL/

RESET button to change the display to the CHG SETTING.

■Customized Features

1Customized Features

To customize other features, press the /

button.

2List of customizable options P. 92

2Example of customization settings P. 94

Customization is possible when you see the driver’s

ID (DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2) on the CHG SETTING

screen.

The driver’s ID indicates which remote transmitter

you have used to unlock the driver’s door.

The customized settings are recalled every time you

unlock the driver’s door with that remote.

When you customize settings:

Shift to (P.

SEL/RESET Button

Enters the selected item.

/ Button

Changes the customize

menu and items.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Continued

Instrument Panel

■Customization flow

Press the / button.

SEL/RESET

CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

TRIP A INFO RESET

LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY

MEMORY POSITION LINK

INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME

HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY

AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE

KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT

METER SETUP

POSITION SETUP

LIGHTING SETUP

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP

SEL/RESET

PTG KEYLESS OPEN MODE*

EXIT

CHG SETTING

DEFAULT ALL

EXIT

SEL/RESET

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Instrument Panel

■List of customizable options

*: Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

METER

SETUP

LANGUAGE SELECTION Changes the displayed language. ENGLISH*/FRENCH/SPANISH

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.

DISPLAY Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F* ~ +5°F (U.S.)

-3°C ~ ±0°C* ~ +3°C (Canada)

TRIP A INFO RESET

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,

average fuel economy A, average speed A, and

elapsed time A.

with REFUEL/

MANUAL ONLY*/IGN OFF

POSITION

SETUP MEMORY POSITION LINK Changes the driver's seat and the outside mirror

positions to a stored setting. ON*/OFF

LIGHTING

SETUP

INTERIOR LIGHT

DIMMING TIME

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on

after you close the doors. 60 sec/30 sec*/15 sec

HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF

TIMER

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay

on after you close the driver's door. 60 sec/30 sec/15 sec*/0 sec

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. MAX/HIGH/MID*/LOW/MIN

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Not available on all models

*2: Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

DOOR/

WINDOW

SETUP

AUTO DOOR LOCK Changes the setting for the automatic locking

feature.

SHIFT FROM (P/WITH VEH

SPEED*2/OFF

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

automatically.

SHIFT TO (P *2/IGN OFF/OFF

DRIVER DOOR*2/ALL DOORS

KEY AND REMOTE

UNLOCK MODE

Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock

on the first push of the remote transmitter. DRIVER DOOR*2/ALL DOOR

KEYLESS LOCK

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd

push)- The beeper sounds. ON*2/OFF

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and

the security system to set after you unlock the

vehicle without opening any door.

90 sec/60 sec/30 sec*2

PTG KEYLESS OPEN

MODE*1

Changes the keyless setting for when the power

tailgate opens.

ANYTIME*2 / WHEN

UNLOCKED

DEFAULT

ALL

Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as

default. CANCEL*2/SET

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Instrument Panel

■Example of customization settings

The steps for changing the TRIP A INFO RESET setting to with REFUEL are shown

below. The default setting for TRIP A INFO RESET is MANUAL ONLY.

1. Press and release / button until

CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS appears on the

display.

2. Press the SEL/RESET button.

uCHG SETTING appears on the display.

3. Press the SEL/RESET button to go into the

METER SETUP group.

4. Press the SEL/RESET button again.

uLANGUAGE SELECTION appears first

on the display.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Instrument Panel

5. Press the / button until TRIP A

INFO RESET appears on the display, then

press the SEL/RESET button.

uThe display switches to the setup screen,

where you can select with REFUEL,

MANUAL ONLY, IGN OFF, or EXIT.

6. Press the / button and select with

REFUEL, then press the SEL/RESET button.

uThe with REFUEL setup screen appears,

then the display returns to the customize

item screen.

7. Press the / button until EXIT

appears on the display, then press the SEL/

RESET button.

8. Repeat Step 7 until you return to the

normal screen.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Setting the Clock ................................ 98

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions .................... 99

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Outside .......................................... 101

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Inside ............................................. 103

Childproof Door Locks ..................... 104

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 105

Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 110

Security System ................................ 118

Immobilizer System .......................... 118

Security System Alarm*.................... 118

Opening and Closing the Windows..... 120

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

...... 123

Operating the Switches Around the

Steering Wheel

Ignition Switch................................. 124

Turn Signals..................................... 125

Light Switches.................................. 125

Fog Lights*...................................... 127

Daytime Running Lights ................... 127

Wipers and Washers ........................ 128

Brightness Control ........................... 130

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*

Button ........................................... 131

Driving Position Memory System*.... 132

Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 134

Adjusting the Mirrors....................... 135

Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 135

Power Door Mirrors ......................... 136

Adjusting the Seats .......................... 137

Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 137

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience

Items ................................................ 150

Interior Lights .................................. 150

Interior Convenience Items .............. 152

Climate Control System ................... 165

Using Automatic Climate Control .... 165

Automatic Climate Control Sensors ......170

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

Controls

Setting the Clock

Clock

You can adjust the time in the clock display, using the CLOCK button with the

ignition switch in ON (w.

1. Press the CLOCK button to access the clock

adjustment mode screen.

2. Press to select the item you want to

adjust (12/24 hour mode, hour, minute).

3. Rotate to make the adjustment.

4. Press to enter your selection. Repeat

steps 2 to 4 to adjust other items.

5. To enter the selection, press and select

EXIT, then press .

Models with audio/information screen

1Clock

These indications are used to show how to operate

the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

You can also press the SETUP button to access the

clock adjustment mode screen.

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select CLOCK ADJUST on the

screen.

3. Press , CLOCK ADJUST appears.

The clock is automatically updated through the

navigation system, so the time does not need to be

adjusted.

Models with navigation system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued

Controls

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions

This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and

to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate.

You can also use the remote transmitter to

lock and unlock the doors and tailgate.

■Master Keys

1Key Types and Functions

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The

immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle

theft.

2Immobilizer System P. 118

The keys contain precision electronics.

Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to

the electronics:

•Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in

locations with high temperature or high humidity.

•Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.

•Keep the keys away from liquids.

•Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the

battery.

If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine

may not start, and the remote transmitter may not

work.

If the keys do not work properly, have them

inspected by a dealer.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

100

Controls

Can be used to start and stop the engine, and

lock and unlock driver's door.

Contains a number that you will need if you

purchase a replacement key.

■Valet Key

1Valet Key

When you need to leave a key with a third party,

leave the valet key.

■Key Number Tag

1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a

safe place outside of your vehicle.

If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a

dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,

contact a dealer.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

101

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Continued

Controls

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■Locking the doors

Press the lock button.

Once:

uSome exterior lights flash, all the doors

and tailgate lock, and the security

Twice (within five seconds after the first

push):

uA beeper sounds and verifies the security

system is set.

■Unlocking the doors

Press the unlock button.

Once:

uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the

driver's door unlocks.

Twice:

uThe remaining doors and tailgate unlock.

■Using the Remote Transmitter

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of

unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,

the doors will automatically relock.

You can change the relock timer setting.

2Customized Features P. 90

If the interior light switch is in the door activated

position, the interior lights come on when you press

the unlock button.

No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30

seconds.

Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off

immediately.

2Interior Lights P. 150

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so

the operating range may vary depending on the

surroundings.

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door or

the tailgate is open.

If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is

probably low.

If the LED does not come on when you press a

button, the battery is dead.

2Replacing the Button Battery P. 424

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

2Customized Features P. 90

Models with multi-information display

LED

Unlock

Button

Lock

Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

system sets.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

102

Controls

Fully insert the key and turn it.

■Locking the driver's door

Push the lock tab rearward a or push the

master door lock switch in the lock direction

b, and close the door.

■Locking the passenger's doors

Push the lock tab rearward and close the door.

■Lockout prevention system

The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch, and

any door or the tailgate is open.

■Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

When you lock the driver's door with a key, all of the

other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When

unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the

key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the

remaining doors and the tailgate.

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

2Customized Features P. 90

Models with multi-information display

Lock

Unlock

■Locking a Door Without Using a Key

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors

and tailgate lock at the same time.

Make sure you have the key in your hand before

locking the door to prevent it from being locked in

the vehicle.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

103

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Controls

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■Locking a door

Pull the lock tab.

■Unlocking a door

Push the lock tab in.

Press the master door lock switch in as shown

to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.

■Using the Lock Tab

1Using the Lock Tab

When you lock/unlock either front door using the

master door lock switch, tailgate, glass hatch, and all

the other doors lock/unlock at the same time.

To Unlock

Lock Tab

To Lock

■Using the Master Door Lock Switch

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the

master door lock switch, all the other doors and the

tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.

The front passenger's door also has the master door

lock switch.

To Unlock

Master Door

Lock Switch

To Lock

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

104

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

Controls

Childproof Door Locks

The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside

regardless of the position of the lock tab.

Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock

position, and close the door.

■When opening the door

Open the door using the outside door handle.

■Setting the Childproof Door Locks

1Childproof Door Locks

To open the door from the inside when the

childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the

unlock position, lower the rear window, put your

hand out of the window, and pull the outside door

handle.

Lock

Unlock

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

105

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Controls

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver’s door automatically when a

certain condition is met.

■Drive lock mode

All doors and the tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph

■Park unlock mode

The driver’s door unlocks when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake

■Auto Door Locking

■Auto Door Unlocking

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

You can turn off or change to another auto door

locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock

switch.

2Customizing the Auto Door Locking/

Unlocking Setting* P. 106

You can turn off or change to another auto door

locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information

display.

2Customized Features P. 90

Models without multi-information display

Models with multi-information display

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

(15 km/h).

pedal depressed.

106

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Controls

Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.

■Auto door locking

■Auto door unlocking

*1: Default setting

■List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options

Mode Description

Drive Lock Mode*1 All doors and the tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Park Lock Mode All doors and the tailgate lock when the shift lever is moved out of (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Off The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.

Mode Description

Park Unlock Mode

Driver’s door unlocks.*1 All doors and the tailgate unlock.

When the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Ignition Switch Unlock

Mode

Driver’s door unlocks. All doors and the tailgate unlock.

When the ignition switch is moved out of ON (w.

Off The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

107

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Continued

Controls

*1: Default setting

■Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options

Steps Drive Lock Mode*1 Park Lock Mode Off

1Apply the parking brake. Make sure the shift lever is in (P.

2Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

3The driver’s door must be closed at this stage. Open the driver’s door.

4Move the shift lever out of (P with the

brake pedal depressed. −

Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more

than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice.

Press and hold the front of the master

door lock switch on the driver’s door for

more than five seconds. Release the switch

after you hear one click.

6Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY

(q within 20 seconds. −

7Move the shift lever to (P. −

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0

within 20 seconds.

uCustomization is completed.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0

within 20 seconds.

uCustomization is completed.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0

within 20 seconds.

uCustomization is completed.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

108

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Controls

*1: Default setting

■Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options

Steps

Ignition Switch Unlock Mode Park Unlock Mode

Off

To unlock driver’s

door

To unlock all doors

and the tailgate

To unlock driver’s

door*1

To unlock all doors

and the tailgate

1Apply the parking brake. Make sure the shift lever is in (P.

2Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

3The driver’s door must be closed at this stage. Open the driver’s door.

4Move the shift lever out of (P with the brake pedal

depressed. −

Press and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more than five seconds. You will hear a click twice.

6Release the switch.

Keep pressing the

switch for another five

seconds to hear one

more click.

Release the switch.

Keep pressing the

switch for another five

seconds to hear one

more click.

Release the switch.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

109

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Controls

*1: Default setting

Steps

Ignition Switch Unlock Mode Park Unlock Mode

Off

To unlock driver’s door To unlock all doors and

the tailgate To unlock driver’s door*1

To unlock all

doors and

the tailgate

Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q within 20

seconds.

uCustomization is completed.

−

8Move the shift lever to (P. −

9Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 within 20 seconds.

uCustomization is completed.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 within

20 seconds.

uCustomization is completed.

Turn the ignition switch to

LOCK (0 within 20

seconds.

uCustomization is

completed.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

110

Controls

Opening and Closing the Tailgate

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or

closing it.

■Opening the tailgate

•Open the tailgate all the way.

uIf it is not fully opened, the tailgate may come down accidentally by its

•Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.

■Closing the tailgate

Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:

uAvoid possible damage.

uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

2Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 65

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to

put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo

area when closing the tailgate.

When operating the power tailgate, make sure there

is enough space around your vehicle. People near the

tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or

closes on their heads. Be especially cautious if

children are around.

When you are storing or picking up luggage from the

cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in

front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.

Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They

may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden

acceleration, or a crash.

WARNING

Closing a power tailgate while anyone is in

the path of the tailgate can cause serious

injury.

Make sure everyone is clear before closing

the tailgate.

Models with power tailgate

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

own weight.

111

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate Using the Tailgate Release Button

Controls

Opening/Closing the Tailgate Using

the Tailgate Release Button

When all the doors are unlocked, the tailgate

is unlocked. Press the tailgate release button

and lift open the tailgate.

To manually close the tailgate, grab the inner

handle, pull the tailgate down, and push it

closed from outside.

Tailgate

Release

Button

Inner Handle

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

112

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

Controls

Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the

remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate button on the driver's door, or

pressing the button on the tailgate.

■The power tailgate can be opened when:

•The tailgate and glass hatch are fully closed.

•The shift lever is in (P.

•The key is not in the ignition switch when using the remote transmitter.

•You have changed the PTG KEYLESS OPEN MODE setting to WHEN

UNLOCKED, you need to unlock the tailgate before you press the tailgate button

to open it.

2Customized Features P. 90

■The power tailgate can be closed when:

•The tailgate is fully open.

•The key is not in the ignition switch when using the remote transmitter.

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

The power tailgate may not open or close under the

following conditions:

•The vehicle is parked on a steep hill.

•The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind.

•The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice.

If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are

locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.

If you replace the battery or the power tailgate fuse

while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be

disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you

manually close the tailgate.

Installing aftermarket components other than

genuine Honda accessories on the power tailgate

may prevent it from fully opening or closing.

Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you

get your luggage in and out.

Make sure the power tailgate is fully closed before

you start the vehicle.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 113

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

Controls

Press the power tailgate button for more than

one second to operate.

To reverse direction while the power tailgate is

in operation, press the button again. The

beeper sounds three times and the tailgate

reverses direction.

■Customizing when to open the tailgate

ANYTIME:

The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the default setting.

WHEN UNLOCKED:

The tailgate opens when all doors are unlocked.

2Customized Features P. 90

To change the setting, do the following:

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

3. Press and hold the power tailgate button in the driver' s door until you

hear a beep.

4. Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0.

uWhen ANYTIME is set, you hear one long beep.

uWhen WHEN UNLOCKED is set, you hear three short beeps.

■Remote Transmitter

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening

or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the

direction. Three beeps sound.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the

tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully

closes.

Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the

tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you

touch either sensor when you are trying to close the

tailgate.

Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp

object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the

power tailgate closing feature malfunctions.

Power

Tailgate

Button

Models with multi-information display

Models without multi-information display

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

114

Controls

To open or close the power tailgate, press the

tailgate button in the driver's door for about

one second. The beeper sounds and some

exterior lights flash.

To reverse direction while the power tailgate is

in operation, press the button again. The

beeper sounds three times and the tailgate

reverses direction.

Press the button on the tailgate to close the

power tailgate.

If you press the button again while the power

tailgate is closing, it stops and reverses

direction.

■Power Tailgate Button

Power

Tailgate

Button

■Power Tailgate Close Button

1Power Tailgate Close Button

If you push the power tailgate close button while the

tailgate is automatically opening or closing, the

power tailgate operation stops. Use caution if the

tailgate stops in the middle of either operation. It may

suddenly swing up or down.

Power

Tailgate

Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

115

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

Controls

If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically.

The power tailgate fail-safe mode detects if there is an extra load on the tailgate (for

example, it is covered with snow). If an extra load is detected, the tailgate opens

completely then lowers to the close position.

■Auto-Closer

■Power Tailgate Fail-safe Mode

1Auto-Closer

The auto-closer feature does not activate if you push

the tailgate release button while the power tailgate is

closing.

Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power

tailgate is latching.

Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you

manually close the tailgate and let it latch

automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands

around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself.

1Power Tailgate Fail-safe Mode

If you try to manually close the power tailgate

immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate

fail-safe mode may activate.

Once the power tailgate fail-safe mode activates,

wait until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away

from the power tailgate when it is in motion.

If the power tailgate fail-safe mode constantly

activates, consult at a dealer.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

116

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Glass Hatch

Controls

Opening/Closing the Glass Hatch

The glass hatch can be operated by pressing the glass hatch release button* on the

remote transmitter, pressing the glass hatch release button on the driver's door, or

pressing the button on the tailgate.

■Opening the glass hatch

•Open the glass hatch all the way.

uIf it is not fully opened, the glass hatch may come down accidentally by

its own weight.

•Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the glass hatch to close.

■Closing the glass hatch

•To close the glass hatch, lower it and press on the handle until it latches.

•Keep the glass hatch closed while driving to:

uAvoid possible damage.

uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

2Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 65

1Opening/Closing the Glass Hatch

The rear wiper does not operate with the glass hatch

open.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

117

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Glass Hatch

Controls

Press the glass hatch release button for more

than one second to operate.

To open the glass hatch, press the glass hatch

release button in the driver' s door or press the

button on the tailgate for about one second.

uThe beeper sounds and some exterior

lights flash.

■Remote Transmitter*

Glass Hatch

Release

Button

■Glass Hatch Release Button*

Glass Hatch

Release

Button

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

118

Controls

Security System

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from

starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic

signals to verify the key.

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch:

•Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch.

•Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.

•Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the

ignition switch.

Security System Alarm*

The security system alarm activates when the doors, tailgate, glass hatch, or hood is

opened without the key, or remote transmitter.

■When the security system alarm activates

The horn sounds intermittently, and all the exterior lights flash.

■To deactivate the security system alarm

Unlock the vehicle using the key or remote transmitter. The system, along with the

horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

1Immobilizer System

NOTICE

Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in

theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.

Always take the ignition key with you whenever you

leave the vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.

Doing so may damage the system and make your

vehicle inoperable.

1Security System Alarm*

The security alarm continues for a maximum of two

minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

119

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm*

Controls

■Setting the security system alarm

The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have

been met:

•The ignition switch is in LOCK (0, and the key has been removed from the

ignition switch.

•The hood and tailgate are closed.

•All doors, the tailgate, and the glass hatch are locked with the key or the

remote transmitter.

■When the security system alarm sets

The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the

blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.

■To cancel the security system alarm

The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key or

remote transmitter. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

■The PANIC button on the remote

transmitter

If you press the PANIC button for

approximately one second, the following will

occur for about 30 seconds:

•The horn sounds.

•Some exterior lights flash.

■Canceling panic mode

Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

■Panic Mode

1Security System Alarm*

Do not set the security system alarm when someone

is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can

accidentally activate when:

•Unlocking the door with the lock tab or the master

door lock switch.

If the battery goes dead after you have set the

security system alarm, the security alarm may go off

once the battery is recharged or replaced.

If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by

unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add another

device to it.

PANIC

Button

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

120

Controls

Opening and Closing the Windows

Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON

(w, using the switches on the doors. The driver side switches can be used to open

and close all of the windows.

The power window lock button on the driver side must be switched off (not pushed

in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the

driver's seat.

When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you

can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when

children are in the vehicle.

■Automatic operation

To open: Push the switch down firmly.

To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To

stop the window at any time, push or pull the

switch briefly.

■Manual operation

To open: Push the switch down lightly.

To close: Pull the switch up lightly.

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

■Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The power windows can be operated for up to 10

minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

Auto Reverse

If a power window senses resistance when closing

automatically, it will stop closing and reverse

direction.

The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled

when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the

window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

WARNING

Closing a power window on someone's

hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from

the windows before closing them.

OFF

Power Window

Lock Button

Indicator

Driver’s

Window

Switch

Front Passenger’s

Window Switch

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

121

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

Continued

Controls

To open: Push the switch down.

To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

To open: Press the unlock button twice

within 10 seconds and hold it down for the

second time. If the windows stop midway,

repeat the procedure.

■

Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function

Open

■Opening the Windows and Moonroof* with the Remote

Transmitter

Unlock

Button

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

122

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

Controls

To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the

key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to

the central position, turn the key in the unlock

direction and hold it there.

To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.

Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the

central position, turn the key in the lock

direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows/

moonroof at the desired position. If you want

further adjustment, repeat the same

operation.

■Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof* with the Key

Close Open

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

123

Controls

Opening and Closing the Moonroof*

You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w. Use the

switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

■Automatic operation

To open: Pull the switch back firmly,

To close: Push the switch forward firmly,

The moonroof will automatically open or close

all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,

touch the switch briefly.

■Manual operation

To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it

until the desired position is reached.

To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it

until the desired position is reached.

■Tilting the moonroof up

To tilt: Push on the center of the

To close: Push the switch forward firmly,

■Opening/Closing the Moonroof

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing

temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice

can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10

minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse

function causes the moonroof to change directions,

then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the

moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully

closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,

are clear of the moonroof.

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to

operate the moonroof.

2Opening the Windows and Moonroof*

with the Remote Transmitter P. 121

2Opening/Closing the Windows and

Moonroof* with the Key P. 122

WARNING

Opening or closing the moonroof on

someone's hands or fingers can cause

serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of

the moonroof before opening or closing it.

Open

Tilt

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

then release.

moonroof switch.

124

Controls

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

Ignition Switch

1Ignition Switch

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is

in (P.

If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK

(0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound

to remind you to take the key out.

When this happens, the following messages appear

on the multi-information display*:

•In LOCK (0: REMOVE KEY

•In ACCESSORY (q: REMOVE KEY The buzzer will

stop when you take the key out.

If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY

(q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left

and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing

the key to turn.

(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this

position.

(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and

other accessories in this position.

(w ON: This is the position when driving.

(e START: This position is for starting the engine.

The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of

the key.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

125

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Continued

Controls

Turn Signals

The turn signals can be used when the ignition

switch is in ON (w.

Light Switches

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on

and off, regardless of the position of the

ignition switch.

■High beams

Push the lever forward until you hear a click.

■Low beams

When in high beams, pull the lever back to

return to low beams.

■Flashing the high beams

Pull the lever back, and release it.

Right Turn

Left Turn

■Manual Operation

1Light Switches

If you remove the key from the ignition switch while

the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s

door is opened.

Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off

because it will cause the battery to discharge.

High Beams

Flashing the high

beams

Low Beams

Turns on parking, side marker,

tail, and rear license plate lights

Turns on headlights, parking, side

marker, tail, and rear license plate

lights

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

126

Controls

Automatic lighting control can be used when

the ignition switch is in ON (w.

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the

headlights and other exterior lights will switch

on and off automatically depending on the

ambient brightness.

uYou can change the auto light sensitivity

setting.

2Customized Features P. 90

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off

within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the driver's door.

uYou can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

2Customized Features P. 90

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 with the headlight switch on, but do not

open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in

the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock

the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the

driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

■Automatic Lighting Control

1Automatic Lighting Control

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually

when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas

such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The light sensor is in the location shown below.

Do not cover this light sensor with anything;

otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not

work properly.

Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

Setting The exterior lights come on

when the ambient light is at

MAX

HIGH

MID

LOW

MIN

Light Sensor

Bright

Dark

■Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

127

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*

Controls

Fog Lights*

When the low beam headlights are on, turn

the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Daytime Running Lights

The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following

conditions have been met:

•The ignition switch is in ON (w.

•The headlight switch is off, or in .

•The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition

switch will turn off the daytime running lights.

The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight

switch is turned on.

1Fog Lights*

When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the

instrument panel will be on.

Fog Light Switch

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

128

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Controls

Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be

used when the ignition switch is in ON (w.

■MIST

The wipers run at high speed until you release

the lever.

■Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)

Change the wiper switch setting according to

the amount of rain.

■Adjusting the delay

Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper

delay.

■Washer

Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.

When you release the lever, the wipers make

two or three more sweeps before stopping.

■Front Wiper/Washer

1Wipers and Washers

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.

The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber

blades will get damaged.

NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the

windshield, becoming stuck.

Operating the wipers in this condition may damage

the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the

windshield, then turn the wipers on.

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.

The pump may get damaged.

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are

operating intermittently, the length of the wipe

interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the

wipers make a single sweep.

When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s

shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become

the same.

Intermittent Time

Adjustment Ring

MIST

INT: Low speed with

intermittent

OFF

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull to use

washer.

Long delay

Short delay

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

129

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Controls

The rear wiper and washer can be used when

the ignition switch is in ON (w.

■Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)

Change the wiper switch setting according to

the amount of rain.

■Washer ( )

Sprays while you rotate the switch to this

position.

Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the

washer. Once released, it stops operating

after a few more sweeps.

■Operating in reverse

When you shift the transmission to (R with the front wiper activated, the rear wiper

operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.

■Rear Wiper/Washer

1Wipers and Washers

If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such

as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe

place.

Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition

switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0, then remove

the obstacle.

The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may

stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an

overload. Wiper operation will return to normal

within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to

normal.

INT: Intermittent

OFF

ON: Continuous wipe

Washer

Front Wiper Position Rear Wiper Operation

INT (Intermittent) Intermittent

LO (Low speed wipe)

HI (High speed wipe) Continuous

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

130

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Controls

Brightness Control

When the ignition switch is in ON (w, you can

use the brightness control knob to adjust

instrument panel brightness.

Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.

Dim: Turn the knob to the left.

You will hear a beep when the brightness

reaches minimum or maximum. The

information display*/multi-information

display* will return to its original state several

seconds after you adjust the brightness.

■Brightness level indicator

The brightness level is shown on the

information display*/multi-information

display* while you are adjusting it.

1Brightness Control

Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on

whether the exterior lights are on or off. The

instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are

on.

Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob or the /

(information) button* switches the display.

If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness

display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels

the reduced instrument panel brightness when the

exterior lights are on.

Control Knob

On multi-information display

On information display

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

131

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

Controls

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window

and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w.

The rear defogger and heated door mirrors

automatically switch off after 15 minutes.

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be

careful not to damage the heating wires.

It is critical to wipe the window from side to side

along the defogger heating wires.

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off

when the window has been defogged.

Also, do not use the system for a long period when

the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,

making it difficult to start the engine.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

132

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*

Controls

Driving Position Memory System*

You can store two driver’s seat and door mirror positions with the driving position

memory system.

When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter, the seat and

door mirrors adjust automatically to one of the two preset positions.

The multi-information display shows you which remote transmitter you used to

unlock the vehicle when you enter.

•Driver 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.

•Driver 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.

1Driving Position Memory System*

Using the multi-information display, you can disable

the automatic seat adjustment function.

2Customized Features P. 90

The customize setting is also stored by the Driver 1

and 2 transmitters. What setting is recalled next time

depends on which transmitter you use to unlock and

open the driver's door.

Driver 1 Driver 2

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

133

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*

Controls

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w. Adjust

the driver’s seat and the door mirrors to the

desired position.

2. Press the SET button.

uYou will hear a beep, and the memory

button indicator light will blink.

3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2

within five seconds of pressing the SET

button.

uOnce the seat and the door mirror

positions have been memorized, the

indicator light on the button you pressed

stays on.

1. Move the shift lever to (P.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Press a memory button ((1 or (2).

uYou will hear a beep, and the indicator

light will blink.

The seat and the door mirrors will

automatically move to the memorized

positions. When they have finished moving,

you will hear a beep, and the indicator light

stays on.

■Storing a Position in Memory

1Storing a Position in Memory

After you press the SET button, the storing operation

will be canceled when:

•You do not press the memory button within five

seconds.

•You readjust the seat position before the double-

beep.

•You readjust the door mirrors.

•You turn the ignition switch to any position except

ON (w.

Memory Button 1

Memory Button 2

SET Button

■Recalling the Stored Position

1Recalling the Stored Position

The seat and the door mirrors will stop moving if you:

•Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or

(2).

•Adjust the seat position.

•Adjust the door mirrors.

•Shift into any position except (P.

Memory Button 1

Memory Button 2

SET Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

134

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Controls

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you

can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. Push the steering wheel adjustment

lever down.

uThe steering wheel adjustment lever

is under the steering column.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out.

uMake sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators.

3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up

to lock the steering wheel in position.

uAfter adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering

wheel in place by trying to move it up,

down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

Make any steering wheel adjustments before you

start driving.

WARNING

Adjusting the steering wheel position while

driving may cause you to lose control of the

vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the

vehicle is stopped.

Lever

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

135

Controls

Adjusting the Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror

Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct

driving position.

Flip the tab to switch the position.

The night position will help to reduce the glare

from headlights behind you when driving

after dark.

When driving after dark, the automatic

dimming rearview mirror always reduces the

glare from headlights behind you.

■Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*

1Adjusting the Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and

adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

2Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 137

Tab

Daytime

Position

Night Position

Down

■Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

Sensor

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

The auto dimming function cancels when the shift

position is in (R.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

136

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Controls

Power Door Mirrors

You can adjust the door mirrors when the

ignition switch is in ON (w.

■Mirror position adjustment

L/R selector switch: Select the left or right

mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the

switch to the center position.

Mirror position adjustment switch: Press

the switch left, right, up, or down to move

the mirror.

If activated, either side door mirror

automatically tilts downward when you put

the shift lever in (R; this improves close-in

visibility on the selected side of the vehicle

when reversing. The mirror automatically

returns to its original position when you shift

out of (R.

To activate this feature, turn the ignition

switch to ON (w and slide the selector switch

to the left or right side.

Selector

Switch

Adjustment

Switch

■Reverse Tilt Door Mirror*

Selector Switch

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

137

Continued

Controls

Adjusting the Seats

Adjusting the Seat Positions

Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible

while allowing you to maintain full control of

the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,

well back in the seat and be able to

adequately press the pedals without leaning

forward, and grip the steering wheel

comfortably. The passenger's seat should be

adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far

back from the front airbag in the dashboard

as possible.

■Adjusting the front power seat(s)*

1Adjusting the Seats

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow

at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the

steering wheel and the chest.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

WARNING

Sitting too close to a front airbag can result

in serious injury or death if the front

airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front

airbags as possible while maintaining

control of the vehicle.

Move back.

Allow sufficient

space.

Horizontal Position

Adjustment

Height Adjustment

(Driver's seat only) Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Lumbar Support

Adjustment

(Driver's seat

only)

Driver’s seat is

shown.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

138

Controls

■Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*

1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and

forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Horizontal Position

Adjustment

Pull up on the bar to move the

seat, then release the bar.

Height Adjustment

(Driver side only)

Pull up or push down the lever

to raise or lower the seat.

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Pull up the lever to

change the angle.

Driver’s seat is shown.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 139

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

Controls

■Adjusting the second row seats

1Adjusting the second row seats

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and

forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Horizontal Position

Adjustment

Pull up on the bar to move the

seat, then release the bar.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

140

Controls

Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,

upright position, leaving ample space

between your chest and the airbag cover in

the center of the steering wheel.

The front seat passenger should also

adjust their seat-back to a comfortable,

upright position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the

occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the

chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a

seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

■Adjusting the Seat-Backs

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the

seat-back and your back.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag

operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering

wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend

that you investigate whether some type of adaptive

equipment may help.

WARNING

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in

serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,

and sit well back in the seat.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 141

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

Controls

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints

in all seating positions.

Head restraints are most effective for

protection against whiplash and other rear-

impact crash injuries when the center of the

back of the occupant's head rests against the

center of the restraint. The tops of the

occupant's ears should be level with the

center height of the restraint.

■Adjusting the Head Restraints

1Adjusting the Head Restraints

WARNING

Improperly positioning head restraints

reduces their effectiveness and increases

the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and

positioned properly before driving.

Position head in the center

of the head restraint.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

142

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

Controls

■Adjusting the front, second row outer, and third row outer head restraint

positions

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint: Push it down

while pressing the release button.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

143

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

Continued

Controls

A passenger sitting in the second row/third

row center seating position should adjust

the height of their head restraint to an

appropriate position before the vehicle

begins moving.

To raise the head restraint:

Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint:

Push it down while pressing the release

button.

Push short side of the cap and pry up on long

side of the cap. Push the release buttons

sideways, and push the restraint down.

■Changing the Second Row/Third Row Center Seat Head

Restraint Positions

Long side

Short side

Third row center seat

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

144

Controls

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove a head restraint:

Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the

restraint up and out.

To reinstall a head restraint:

Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height

while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked

in position.

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their

seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their

seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine

is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example,

if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or

sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is

greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or

fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an

inflating front airbag.

■Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

■Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

WARNING

Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the

head restraints can result in severe injury

during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before

driving.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

WARNING

Sitting improperly or out of position can

result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat,

with your feet on the floor.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

145

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

Controls

The driver’s and front passenger’s seats have active head restraints. In a rear impact,

an occupant properly secured by a seat belt will be pushed against the seat-back and

the head restraint will move forward. This reduces the distance between the

restraint and the occupant’s head, which helps reduce the likelihood of whiplash

and injuries to the neck and upper spine.

■Active Head Restraints

1Active Head Restraints

In order for the active head restraints to operate

properly:

•Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or

from the restraint legs.

•Do not place any objects between an occupant and

the seat-back.

•Install each restraint in its proper location.

After a collision, the activated restraint should return

to its normal position. If the restraint does not return

to its normal position, or in the event of a severe

collision, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

146

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Controls

Rear Seats

The second row seats can fold down separately to allow for additional

■To fold down the seat

1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the

anchor buckle.

2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling.

2Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 34

3. Lower the center head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into

the seat-back.

4. Pull the release lever.

■To return the seat to the original

position

Pull the seat-back up in the upright position.

■Folding Down the Second Row Seats

1Folding Down the Second Row Seats

Make sure all items in the cargo area or items

extending to the rear seats are properly

secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have

to brake hard.

Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and

floor before you fold down the rear seat.

The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they

do not interfere with the second seats as they fold

down.

1To return the seat to the original position

Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat

cushion are securely latched back into place before

driving.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

storage space.

Continued 147

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Controls

The third row seats can fold down separately to allow for additional storage space.

■To fold down the seat

1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the

anchor buckle.

2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling and side panel.

2Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 34

3. Lower the center head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into

the seat-back.

4. Pull the release lever.

■To return the seat to the original

position

Pull the seat-back up in the upright position.

■Folding Down the Third Row Seats

1Folding Down the Third Row Seats

Make sure all items in the cargo area or items

extending to the rear seats are properly

secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have

to brake hard.

Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and

floor before you fold down the rear seat.

When you fold down one side of the rear seats and

use the non-recessed part of the cargo area, make

sure to secure the cargo. Loose items can fly forward

and cause injury if you have to brake hard.

The second seat(s) must be far enough forward so

they do not interfere with the third seats as they fold

down.

1To return the seat to the original position

Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat

cushion are securely latched back into place before

driving.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

148

Controls

Pull up on the seat-back lever.

Slide the whole seat forward.

■Third Row Seat Access

1Third Row Seat Access

When you enter the third row seat, be careful not to

trip over the second row seat belt. If necessary, move

the seat forward after tilting the seat-back forward.

Lever

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

149

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest

Controls

Armrest

The console lid can be used as an armrest.

Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.

■Using the Front Seat Armrest

■Using the Second Row Seat Armrest

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

150

Controls

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights

■ON

The interior lights come on regardless of

whether the doors are open or closed.

■Door activated

The interior lights come on in the following

situations:

•When any of the doors are opened.

•You unlock the driver's door.

•You remove the key from the ignition

switch.

Only the cargo area light comes on when the

tailgate is opened.

■OFF

The interior lights remain off regardless of

whether the doors are open or closed.

■Interior Light Switches

1Interior Light Switches

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade

out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are

closed.

The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following

situations:

•When you unlock the driver's door but do not open

it.

•When you remove the key from the ignition switch

but do not open a door.

The interior lights go off immediately in the following

situations:

•When you lock the driver's door.

•When you close the driver's door with the key in

the ignition switch.

•When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

If you leave any of the doors open without the key in

the ignition switch, the interior lights go off after

about 15 minutes.

You can change the interior lights dimming time.

2Customized Features P. 90

Models with multi-information display

Door Activated

Position

OFF

Front

Door Activated Position

OFF

Cargo Area

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

151

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

Controls

■Front

The map lights can be turned on and off by

pressing the lenses.

■Second and third row

The map lights can be turned on and off by

pressing the lenses when the front interior

light switch is in the door activated position.

■Map Lights

1Map Lights

When the front interior light switch is in the door

activated position and any door is open, the map

light will not go off when you press the lens.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

152

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Controls

Interior Convenience Items

Pull the handle to open the glove box. You

can lock the glove box with the master key.

Pull the handle to open the console

compartment.

■Glove Box

1Glove Box

WARNING

An open glove box can cause serious injury

to your passenger in a crash, even if the

passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while

driving.

Glove Box To Lock

■Console Compartment

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

153

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Continued

Controls

Slide the lid using the release knob to open or

close the console compartment.

Hook the strap to the seat back to use it.

■Under-floor Storage Area

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

154

Controls

Pull the lever and lift the lid to open the

compartment.

■Front seat beverage holders

Are located in the console between the

front seats.

■Storage Compartment

■Beverage Holders

1Beverage Holders

NOTICE

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,

and electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.

Hot liquid can scald you.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

155

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Continued

Controls

■Second row seat beverage holders

Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat

beverage holders.

■Third row seat beverage holders

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

156

Controls

The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY

(q or ON (w.

■Accessory power socket

Open the cover to use it.

■Accessory power socket

Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

■Accessory Power Sockets

1Accessory Power Sockets

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter

element.

This can overheat the power socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply

power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120

watts or less (10 amps).

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket

with the engine running.

When each socket is being used simultaneously, the

combined power rating of the accessories should not

exceed 120 watts (10 amps).

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

(instrument panel)

(console compartment)

157

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Continued

Controls

■Accessory power socket

Open the cover to use it.

■Accessory power socket (cargo area)

Open the cover to use it.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

(back of the console compartment)

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

158

Controls

The AC power outlet can be used when the engine is running.

Open the cover to use it. Plug in the appliance

slightly, turn it 90° clockwise, then push it all

the way.

■AC Power Outlet*

1AC Power Outlet*

NOTICE

Do not use the AC power outlet for electric

appliances that require high initial peak wattage,

such as cathode-ray tube type televisions,

refrigerators, electric pumps, etc. It is not suitable for

devices that process precise data, such as medical

equipment, and that require an extremely stable

power supply, such as microcomputer-controlled

electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

The AC power outlet is designed to supply power for

up to 115 volt appliances that are rated 150 watts or

less.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 159

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Controls

There are coat hooks near the third row seats.

Use the cargo net to store small and

light items.

■Coat Hooks

1Coat Hooks

The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy

items.

■Cargo Net*

1Cargo Net*

NOTICE

To prevent damage, do not place more than 22 lbs

(10 kg) on this cargo net.

Make sure to use the cargo net securely hooked.

WARNING

Do not use this cargo net if the third row

seats are folded down.

Objects placed on the cargo net could be

thrown forward during a crash or sudden

stop and hurt someone.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

160

Controls

Use the floor cargo hooks to secure luggage in

the cargo area.

There is a hook on the side of the cargo area.

■Cargo Hooks

1Cargo Hooks

NOTICE

Do not hang a large object or an object. Hanging

heavy or large objects may damage the hooks.

Hooks

■Grocery Hook

Hook

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 161

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Controls

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release the indent. To close, push it again until

it latches.

You can store eyeglasses and other small

items in this holder.

■Conversation mirror*

The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror.

Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it

back to the first detent.

You can use the mirror to view the rear seats.

■Sunglasses Holder

1Sunglasses Holder

Keep the holder closed while driving except when

accessing stored items.

Push

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

162

Controls

The ignition switch must be in ON (w to use

the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats

faster than the LO setting.

There is no heater in the passenger's seat-

back due to the side airbag cutoff system.

The appropriate indicator will be on while the

seat heater is on. Each time you press the

switch, the mode changes to HI, LO and OFF.

■Seat Heaters*

1Seat Heaters*

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the

engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may

be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and

does not automatically turn off.

WARNING

Heat induced burns are possible when

using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense

temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,

lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or

with sensitive skin should not use seat

heaters.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

163

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Continued

Controls

■Second row seat heaters*

The outer second row seat cushions and seat-

backs are equipped with seat heaters. Turning

the switch on the driver side warms the outer

seat behind the driver’s seat. The passenger

side switch warms the outer seat behind the

front passenger seat.

uPress the right side of the switch, HI, to

rapidly heat up the seat.

When a comfortable temperature is

reached, select LO to keep the seat

warm.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

164

Controls

Pull the tab and roll up the sunshade all the

way. Use the hooks to hang it.

■Integrated Sunshades*

1Integrated Sunshades*

Use the sunshades only when the windows are fully

closed. Using the shade while a window is open can

unhook and blow off the shade, hitting and hurting

anyone sitting near the window.

Hooks

Tab

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

165

Continued

Controls

Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control

The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.

The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will raise or lower

the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.

Use the system when the engine is running.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver's side or passenger's side

control dial.

3. Press the button to cancel.

■Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes

Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions.

Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through

the system.

Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in

fresh air mode in normal situations.

1Using Automatic Climate Control

If any buttons are pressed while using the climate

control system in AUTO, the function of the button

that was pressed will take priority.

The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions

unrelated to the button that was pressed will be

controlled automatically.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the

fan may not start immediately when the AUTO

button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down

more rapidly by partially opening the windows,

turning the system on AUTO, and setting the

temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to

recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper

limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Pressing the button switches the climate

control system between on and off. When turned on,

the system returns to your last selection.

Floor and

defroster vents

Floor ventsDashboard and

floor vents

Dashboard vents

AUTO Button

Driver's Side

Temperature

Control Dial

Passenger's Side

Temperature

Control Dial

/ (Fan Control) Bar

(Recirculation) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

166

Controls

Pressing the button turns the air

conditioning system on and automatically

switches the system to fresh air mode.

Pressing the button again to turn off, the

system returns to the previous settings.

■To rapidly defrost the windows

1. Press the button.

2. Press the button.

■Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower

limit.

When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the

windshield may fog up.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that

the air hits the side windows.

1To rapidly defrost the windows

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air

mode.

If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the

windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes

visibility.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

167

uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode

Controls

Synchronized Mode

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side, the passenger side,

and the rear passenger compartment in synchronized mode.

1. Press the SYNC button.

uThe system will switch to synchronized mode.

2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control dial.

Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

1Synchronized Mode

When you press the button, the system changes

to synchronized mode.

When the system is in tri-zone mode, the driver side

temperature, the passenger side temperature, and

the rear passenger compartment (if it is on) can be set

separately.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

168

uuClimate Control SystemuRear Climate Control System

Controls

Rear Climate Control System

Use the system when the engine is running.

1. Press the REARLOCK button.

uLOCK appears on the front control panel. The rear system changes to

2. The system automatically adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels to maintain the

set rear temperature.

uChange the temperature if necessary.

3. To turn off the rear climate control system, press and hold the REARLOCK button

for a few seconds.

■Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel

1Rear Climate Control System

AUTO LOCK appears on the rear control panel while

the rear lock is on.

If the rear lock is on while in SYNC mode, the rear

control panel is disabled. AUTO LOCK SYNC appears

on the rear control panel.

Rear Temperature

Control Button

Rear Temperature

Control Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

AUTO mode.

169

uuClimate Control SystemuRear Climate Control System

Controls

Use the system when the engine is running.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the interior temperature using the rear temperature control bar.

3. To turn off the rear climate control system, press OFF button repeatedly until the

system shuts off.

■Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel

1Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel

When the REARLOCK button on the front control

panel is off, the temperature of the rear passenger

compartment can be controlled independently.

Fan Control Bar

Rear Temperature

Control Bar OFF Button

MODE Button

AUTO Button

Rear floor vents Rear ceiling vents

and floor vents

Rear ceiling

vents

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

170

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Controls

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

The automatic climate control system is

equipped with a sunlight sensor, an interior

temperature and humidity sensor. Do not

cover or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor

Temperature and

Humidity Sensor

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

171

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System

About Your Audio System................ 172

USB Adapter Cable .......................... 173

Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 173

Audio System Theft Protection ......... 174

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 175

Audio/Information Screen*.............. 176

Audio Remote Controls.................... 184

Adjusting the Sound ........................ 185

Playing the AM/FM Radio ................. 186

Playing the XM® Radio*................... 190

Playing a CD .................................... 193

Models without navigation system

Playing an iPod®............................... 203

Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 207

Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 211

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 216

Audio Remote Controls.................... 217

Adjusting the Sound ........................ 218

Playing the AM/FM Radio................. 219

Playing the XM® Radio..................... 223

Playing a CD .................................... 226

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio .... 230

Playing an iPod®............................... 240

Rear Entertainment System*........... 251

Models with navigation system

Audio Error Messages ...................... 266

General Information on the Audio

System ............................................. 272

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*.. 276

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Using HFL ........................................ 278

HFL Menus ...................................... 280

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Using HFL ........................................ 301

HFL Menus ...................................... 303

Compass*.......................................... 320

Models without navigation system

Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

172

Features

Audio System

About Your Audio System

See the Navigation System Manual for operation of the voice commands.

The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio* service. It can also play

audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, iPod®, iPhone®, USB flash drives, and Bluetooth®

devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or

the remote controls on the steering wheel.

1About Your Audio System

XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only.

For more information on XM® Radio, contact a

dealer.

2General Information on the Audio System

P. 272

XM® Radio is available in the United States and

Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.

Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not

supported.

iPod® and iPhone® are registered trademarks owned

by Apple Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Models with navigation system

Remote Control

iPod®

USB Flash

Drive

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

173

uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable

Features

USB Adapter Cable

1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the

adapter cable.

2. Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB

flash drive to the USB connector.

Auxiliary Input Jack

Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.

1. Open the AUX cover.

2. Connect a standard audio device to the

input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm)

uThe audio system automatically switches

to the AUX mode.

1USB Adapter Cable

•Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the

vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may

damage it.

•Do not use an extension cable with the USB

adapter cable.

•Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a

hub.

•Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard

disk drive, as the device or your files may be

damaged.

•We recommend backing up your data before using

the device in your vehicle.

•Displayed messages may vary depending on the

device model and software version.

If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try

reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To

reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions

provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/

ipod.

1Auxiliary Input Jack

To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode

buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by

pressing the AUX button.

You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace

the audio system.

State or local laws may limit the circumstances in

which you can launch or control your attached audio

device.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

stereo miniplug.

174

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Features

Audio System Theft Protection

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as

when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.

■Reactivating the audio system

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w, and turn on the audio system.

uIf you turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q, you will be requested to

enter the audio security code. See step 3.

2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds.

uThe audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that

the system is in your vehicle.

If the control unit fails to recognize, ENTER CODE appears on the audio/

information screen.

3. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons. If you enter an incorrect

digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter the code

correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit

a dealer to have the system reset.

1Audio System Theft Protection

We recommend that you write down the serial

number in this owner’s manual.

You can find out about your serial number and

security code from a dealer.

You can register the security code at Owner Link

(owners.honda.com.), and find information on how

to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at

radio-navicode.honda.com.

See the Navigation System Manual for details.

U.S. models

Models with navigation system

Models without navigation system

Except LX models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

175

Features

Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or

ON (w.

Use the selector knob or SETUP button to

access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and

extended display for some functions.

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll

through the available choices. Press to set

your selection.

SETUP button: Press to select any mode such

as the Auto Select, Sound Settings, Play

Mode, Resume/Pause, or compass.

RETURN button: Press to go back to the

previous display.

button: Press to change the audio/

information screen brightness. The brightness

can be set differently for the day time and

night time.

Press once for the daytime mode.

Press twice for the nighttime mode.

Adjust the brightness using .

Models without navigation system

1Audio System Basic Operation

These indications are used to show how to operate

the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Selector Knob

SETUP

Button

RETURN

Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

176

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*

Features

Audio/Information Screen*

Displays audio status, trip computer and wallpaper, and allows you to go to various

setup options.

Press DISPLAY button. Rotate and select the mode from the four display modes.

Press .

■Switching the Display

1Switching the Display

These indications are used to show how to operate

the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

DISPLAY Button

Selector Knob

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 177

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*

Features

Shows the current audio information.

2Audio System Basic Operation P. 175

Shows the instant fuel economy, average fuel economy, distance (trip meter),

average speed, elapsed time, and range.

2Instant Fuel Economy P. 82

2Trip Meter P. 82

2Range P. 82

■Average speed

Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

■Elapsed time

Shows the time during one drive cycle.

Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

2Wallpaper Setup P. 179

Minimizes the display by only showing the compass, audio status, and clock on the

upper part of the display.

■Audio Display

■Trip Computer

■Wallpaper

■Minimum Display

1Trip Computer

You can reset the trip computer.

2Trip Computer P. 88

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

178

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*

Features

1. Press SETUP button.

2. Rotate and select the setup option you

want to change. Press .

2DVD setup from the front panel P. 254

2Phone Setup P. 283

2To Create Phone Name/PIN P. 310

2Automatic Answering P. 289

2Automatic Transferring P. 289

2To Clear the System P. 312

2Speed Dial P. 313

■Setting Options

■DVD Setup*

■Phone Setup

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 179

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*

Features

You can change, store, delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

See the navigation system manual for how to change the wallpaper.

■Importing pictures from USB

You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from USB flash drive.

Select Import picture from USB from setup menu and properly connect a USB

flash drive to store an image.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the adapter

cable.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 173

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Rotate to select Wallpaper Setup,

then press .

4. Rotate to select Import picture from

USB, then press .

5. Rotate to select a desired picture, then

press .

uLoading Picture will appear on the

display.

■Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

•When importing wallpaper files, the image must be

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.

Images in a folder cannot be imported.

•The file format of the image that can be imported

is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).

•The maximum image size is 1,024 x 768 pixels.

Smaller images are displayed in the middle of the

screen with the extra area appearing in black.

If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, No

Files will appear.

Models with navigation system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

180

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*

Features

6. The preview of the imported data is

displayed.

7. Rotate to select OK, then press .

uThe imported list number and the

confirmation message will appear. Then

the display will return to the import

wallpaper list.

■Choose wallpaper

1. Rotate to select Choose Wallpaper on the wallpaper setup menu, then

uThe screen will change to the wallpaper list.

2. Rotate to select desired wallpaper and press .

3. Your selection will be indicated by the filled in circle.

uYou can also select Default Wallpaper (Honda logo) or Clock on the list.

■Delete wallpaper

1. Rotate to select Delete Picture from mem on the wallpaper setup menu,

then press .

uThe screen will change to the delete wallpaper list.

2. Rotate to select wallpaper that you want to delete and press .

uThe confirmation message will appear.

3. Rotate to select Yes, then press to delete completely.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

* Not available on all models

181

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*

Continued

Features

You can reset all data on the trip computer.

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Trip Computer Reset,

then press .

3. Rotate to Trip A or Trip B, then

uThe confirmation message will appear.

4. Rotate to select Yes, then press to

reset completely.

■Trip Computer Reset

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

182

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*

Features

■Brightness/Contrast

If you select Brightness or Contrast, adjust

the setting by rotating and pressing .

■Menu Color

If you select Menu Color, rotate to setting

you want, then press .

■Display Setup

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

183

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen*

Features

1. Rotate to select Language Selection,

then press .

2. Rotate to select the language, then

press .

■Language Selection

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

184

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio Remote Controls

Features

Audio Remote Controls

Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.

MODE Button

Cycles through the audio modes as follows:

FM1FM2AMXM1*XM2*CD

CD-LAUX

VOL Button

Press : Increases the volume.

Press : Decreases the volume.

CH Button

•When listening to the radio

Press (+: Selects the next preset radio station.

Press (-: Selects the previous preset radio station.

Press and hold (+: Selects the next strong station.

Press and hold (-: Selects the previous strong station.

•When listening to a CD, CD Library, iPod® or USB flash drive.

Press (+: Skips to the next song.

Press (-: Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

•When listening to a CD or CD Library.

Press and hold (+: Skips to the next folder/album.

Press and hold (-: Goes back to the previous folder/album.

1Audio Remote Controls

The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.

When in AUX mode, the following are operable from

the remote controls:

•iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB

adapter cable

•Bluetooth® Audio (with some phones only)

MODE

Button

(Channel)

Button

VOL

(Volume)

Button

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

185

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Features

Adjusting the Sound

Press the SETUP button, and rotate to

select Sound Settings, then press . Rotate

to scroll through the following choices:

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and

HIGH.

SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle

speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As

you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Selector Knob

RETURN Button

SETUP Button

Speed-sensitive

Volume

Compensation

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

186

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

Features

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Selector Knob

Press and turn to tune the radio

frequency.

SCAN Button

Press to sample each of the strongest

stations on the selected band for 10

seconds. To turn off scan, press the

button again.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Pick a preset button and hold it

until you hear a beep.

To listen to a stored station, select a

band, then press the preset button.

SKIP Bar

Press and hold to search up and down the

selected band for a station with a strong

signal.

CATEGORY Bar (FOLDER Bar)

Press either side to display and

select an RDS category.

TITLE Button

Press to switch the RDS name on and

off.

AM/FM Button

Press to select a band.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

Models without rear entertainment system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

187

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

Continued

Features

Selector Knob

Press and turn to tune the radio

frequency.

SCAN Button

Press to sample each of the strongest

stations on the selected band for 10

seconds. To turn off scan, press the

button again.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Pick a preset button and hold it

until you hear a beep.

To listen to a stored station, select a

band, then press the preset button.

SKIP Bar

Press and hold to search up and down the

selected band for a station with a strong

signal. CATEGORY Bar

Press either side to display and

select an RDS category.

TITLE Button

Press to switch the RDS name on and off.

AM/FM Button

Press to select a band.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

Models with rear entertainment system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

188

Features

Use the auto select feature to scan both bands and store the strongest station in

each preset.

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Auto Select, then

3. Select ON, then press .

To turn off auto select, select OFF, then press

. This restores the presets you originally set.

■Auto Select

1Playing the AM/FM Radio

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating

stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the MODE button on the steering wheel.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 184

You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations

into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you

store six stations each.

Auto Select function scans and stores up to six AM

stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal

into the preset button memory.

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,

you can manually store your preferred frequencies.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

189

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

Features

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

■RDS INFO ON

Press the TITLE button while listening to an RDS capable station. RDS INFO ON

appears, and the station name is displayed.

■To find an RDS station from your selected program category

1. Press the FOLDER bar or the CATEGORY

bar to display and select an RDS category.

2. Use SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS station.

■Radio Data System (RDS)

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

190

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio*

Features

Playing the XM® Radio*

SCAN Button

Press to sample all channels (in the

channel mode), or channels within

a category (in the category mode).

Each sampling continues for a few

seconds. Press SCAN again to

cancel scanning and continue

listening to the channel.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and

off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a channel:

1. Select the channel.

2. Pick a preset button and hold it

until you hear a beep.

To listen to a stored channel, select

XM, then press the preset button.

SKIP Bar

Press to skip to the previous or next

channel.

CATEGORY Bar

Press either side to display and

select an XM® Radio category.

TITLE Button

Press and release to cycle the display

between the name, title, and category.

(XM®) Button

Press to select XM® radio.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display. Selector Knob

Turn to select channel.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

Models without rear entertainment system

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

191

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio*

Continued

Features

SCAN Button

Press to sample all channels (in the

channel mode), or channels within

a category (in the category mode).

Each sampling continues for a few

seconds. Press SCAN again to cancel

scanning and continue listening to

the channel.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a channel:

1. Select the channel.

2. Pick a preset button and hold it

until you hear a beep.

To listen to a stored channel, select

XM, then press the preset button.

SKIP Bar

Press to skip to the previous or next

channel.

CATEGORY Bar

Press either side to display and

select an XM® Radio category.

TITLE Button

Press and release to cycle the display

between the name, title, and category.

(XM®) Button

Press to select XM® radio.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display. Selector Knob

Turn to select channel.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

Models with rear entertainment system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio*

192

Features

1. Press the button to select the XM® radio band (XM1 or XM2).

2. Press and hold the TITLE button to switch between the channel mode and

category mode.

If you press the SETUP button, rotate to select XM Mode, and press .

de by turning and pressing the

3. Select a channel using the TUNE ( ), SKIP, CATEGORY, SCAN, or

1. Press to display a channel list.

2. Rotate to select a channel, then

■To Play the XM® Radio

■To Select a Channel from a List

1Playing the XM® Radio*

In the channel mode, all available channels are

selectable. In the category mode, you can select a

channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

You can store twelve XM® stations in the preset

buttons. XM1 and XM2 let you store six stations

each.

There may be instances when XM® Radio does not

broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).

This does not indicate a problem with your audio

system.

Channel list is shown.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

selector knob.

You can select channel mode or category mo

preset buttons.

193

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Continued

Features

Playing a CD

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC format. With the CD loaded, press the

CD button.

SCAN Button

You will get a 10-second sampling

of each song.

●Press to sample all tracks on the

CD (all files in the current folder

in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

●Press two times to sample the

first file in each of the main

folders (MP3, WMA, or AAC).

●To turn off scan, press and hold

the button.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

CD Button

Press to play a CD

TITLE Button

Press to display the text data on a CD (if it

was recorded with text data).

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob

Turn to change tracks/files. Turn to

select an item, then press to set your

selection.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

Models without rear entertainment system

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change tracks (files in

MP3, WMA or AAC).

Press and hold to move rapidly within a

track/file.

CATEGORY Bar (FOLDER Bar)

Press (+ to skip to the next folder,

and (- to skip to the beginning of

the previous folder in MP3, WMA or

AAC.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

194

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Features

SCAN Button

You will get a 10-second sampling of

each song.

●Press to sample all tracks on the CD

(all files in the current folder in

MP3, WMA, or AAC).

●Press two times to sample the first

file in each of the main folders

(MP3, WMA, or AAC).

●To turn off scan, press and hold the

button.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and

off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change tracks (files in MP3,

WMA or AAC).

Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/

file.

TITLE Button

Press to display the text data on a CD (if it

was recorded with text data).

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

Models with rear entertainment system

CD Button

Press to play a CD

Selector Knob

Turn to change tracks/files. Turn to

select an item, then press to set your

selection.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

CATEGORY Bar

Press (+ to skip to the next folder,

and (- to skip to the beginning of

the previous folder in MP3, WMA or

AAC.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 195

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Features

1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.

2. Rotate to select a folder.

3. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

1Playing a CD

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can

cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays UNSUPPORTED, then

skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following

circumstances:

•When you select a new folder, file, or track.

•When you change the audio mode to CD.

•When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,

the system reloads the CD automatically after several

seconds.

Folder Selection

Track Selection

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

196

Features

You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file.

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Press the RETURN button to go back to the previous

display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this

setting mode.

Play Mode Menu Items

Normal Play

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track/file(s).

Repeat One Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all

files in the current folder.

Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files

in the current folder in random order.

Random in Disc: Plays all tracks/files in random

order.

Scan Tracks: Samples all tracks on the CD.

(MP3/WMA/AAC): Samples all files in the current

folder.

Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Samples the first file

in each folder.

Play Mode Items

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

197

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library

Continued

Features

Playing CD Library

The songs on music CDs can be recorded to the flash memory. You can then play the songs directly from your vehicle’s

audio system.

SCAN Button

You will get a 10-second sampling of

each song.

Press to sample all tracks on the

album list.

●Press two times to sample the first

track in each album list.

●To turn off scan, press and hold the

button.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

CDL Button

Press to play tracks from CD Library.

The previously selected track will be

played.

TITLE Button

Press to display the text data on the album

list (if it was recorded with text data or

data was found from Gracenote®).

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob

Press to display the album list.

Turn to change tracks/albums. Turn

to select an item, then press to set

your selection.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

Models without rear entertainment system

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change tracks.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a

track.

CATEGORY Bar (FOLDER Bar)

Press (+ to skip to the next album,

and (- to skip to the beginning of

the previous album.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

198

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library

Features

SCAN Button

You will get a 10-second

sampling of each song.

Press to sample all tracks on the

album list.

●Press two times to sample the

first track in each album list.

●To turn off scan, press and hold

the button.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change tracks.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.

TITLE Button

Press to display the text data on the album list

(if it was recorded with text data or data was

found from Gracenote®).

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display. SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

Models with rear entertainment system

CDL Button

Press to play tracks from CD Library.

The previously selected track will be

played.

Selector Knob

Press to display the album list.

Turn to change tracks/albums. Turn to

select an item, then press to set your

selection.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

CATEGORY Bar

Press (+ to skip to the next album,

and (- to skip to the beginning of

the previous album.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 199

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library

Features

■If the CD is played in the audio unit for the first time

1. A prompt appears and asks if you want the

currently playing CD to be recorded to the

flash memory.

2. Rotate to select YES. Press to start

recording.

uThe display changes to the album list.

3. Rotate to select one of the album

numbers you want the currently playing CD

to be stored, then press .

4. The display indicates, with an icon, that the

CD is being recorded.

uThe icon disappears when the recording

is finished.

■Recording a Music CD to CD Library

1Playing CD Library

You can store up to 18 albums.

The system supports the recording function from the

standard CD-DA only.

2Recommended CDs P. 273

The system does not support the CD-DA with copy

protection.

Gracenote® searches for the title information for the

CD you have recorded to the flash memory. If the

information is found, song titles are displayed.

While recording a CD:

•If you turn off the ignition switch, you need to

record the CD from the beginning next time you

turn on the ignition switch.

•If you eject the CD, and reload it again, you can

start recording from where it was left off.

Forward/rewind, repeat, random and scan function

are not available during recording. You can listen to

tracks from other album lists while recording.

There is no compensation offered in the case of

unsuccessful recording of audio data or the loss of

audio data due to any cause whatsoever.

Album Number

Current Recording Track Number

Recording Icon

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

200

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library

Features

■Deactivating the prompt display

If you do not want the prompt to appear on the display for the first time you

play a CD:

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select CD Library Setup,

then press .

3. Rotate to select Prompt to Record CD,

then press .

uTo activate the prompt display again,

follow the same procedure.

■Recording a CD Manually 1. Insert a CD you want to record to the flash

memory, and press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select CD Library Setup,

then press .

3. Rotate to select Record CD Now, then

press .

uThe display changes to the album list.

4. Rotate to select one of the album numbers you want the currently playing CD

to be stored, then press .

uIf you select an album number that has already had another CD, the system

asks if you want to replace this album with the album currently in the slot.

Select Yes to replace, and No to return.

Select this option.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 201

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library

Features

You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing CD Library.

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

■Selecting a Play Mode for CD Library

1Selecting a Play Mode for CD Library

Press the RETURN button to go back to the previous

display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this

setting mode.

Play Mode Menu Items

Normal Play

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track.

Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current

album.

Scan Tracks: Samples all tracks on the CD.

Scan Albums: Samples the first track in each album.

Random in Albums: Plays all tracks in the current

album in random order.

Random All: Plays all tracks in the current album list

in random order.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying CD Library

202

Features

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select CD Library Setup,

then press .

3. Rotate to select a menu item, then

■To update Gracenote® Album Info

1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot that includes the update.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Rotate to select CD Library Setup.

4. Rotate to select Update Album Info DB, then press .

5. Rotate to select Yes. Press to start updating.

■Other CD Library Setup Menu

1Other CD Library Setup Menu

CD Library setup menu items

Delete Library Album: Delete albums in CD Library.

Rotate to select an album you want to delete and

select Yes.

Album Info DB Version: Displays the current

album’s database version information.

Update Album Info DB:

2To update Gracenote® Album Info P. 202

1To update Gracenote® Album Info

To acquire updated files:

Consult a dealer

US: Visit www.honda.com.

Canada: Visit www.honda.ca.

Once you perform an update, any information you

edited before will be overwritten or erased.

2Gracenote® End User License Agreement

P. 476

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

203

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Continued

Features

Playing an iPod®

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press the USB/AUX button.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 173

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob

Turn to select a song, file, menu item,

or play mode. Press to set your

selection.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select iPod® (if connected).

SKIP Bar

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

Models without rear entertainment system

USB Indicator

Appears when an iPod® is connected.

Album Art

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

204

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Features

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob

Turn to select a song, file, menu item,

or play mode. Press to set your

selection.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select iPod® (if connected).

SKIP Bar

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

Models with rear entertainment system

USB Indicator

Appears when an iPod® is connected.

Album Art

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 205

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Features

1. Press to display the iPod® menu.

2. Rotate to select a menu.

3. Press to display the items on that menu.

4. Rotate to select an item, then press .

■How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu

1Playing an iPod®

Available operating functions vary on models or

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 268

iPod® Menu

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

206

Features

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Normal Play

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track.

Shuffle All: Plays all available files in a selected list

(playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or

composers) in random order.

Shuffle Repeat: Repeats the shuffle all feature.

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

Shuffle Album Repeat: Repeats the shuffle album

feature.

Play Mode

Items

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

207

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Continued

Features

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the USB/AUX button.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 173

*1:Only AAC format files

recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob

Turn to select a file, then press to set

your selection.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select USB flash drive (if

connected).

SKIP Bar

Press or to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a file.

Models without rear entertainment system

USB Indicator

Appears when a USB flash drive

is connected.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

208

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Features

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob

Turn to select a file, then press to set

your selection.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select USB flash drive (if

connected).

SKIP Bar

Press or to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a file.

Models with rear entertainment system

USB Indicator

Appears when a USB flash drive

is connected.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 209

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Features

1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.

2. Rotate to select a folder.

3. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

2General Information on the Audio System

P. 272

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights

management (DRM) are not played.

The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and

then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 268

Folder Selection

Track Selection

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

210

Features

You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file(s).

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Normal Play

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.

Random All: Plays all files in random order.

Random Repeat: Repeats the random all feature.

Play Mode

Items

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

211

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Continued

Features

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and linked to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2Phone Setup P. 305

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob

Turn to change files. Turn to select an

item, then press to set your selection.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select Bluetooth® Audio.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change files.

Models without rear entertainment system

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is

connected to HFL.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

212

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Features

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob

Turn to change files. Turn to select an

item, then press to set your selection.

SETUP Button

Press to display menu items.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select Bluetooth® Audio.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change files.

Models with rear entertainment system

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone

is connected to HFL.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 213

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Features

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to HFL.

2. Press the USB/AUX button.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not

compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may be already linked.

■To pause or resume a file

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Resume/Pause, then

press .

Each time you press , the setting switches

between Pause and Resume.

■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming

audio capabilities are compatible with the system.

For a list of compatible phones:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data

device functions while driving.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,

there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your

phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating

instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some

phones.

If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input

jack, you may need to press the USB/AUX button

repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

from your phone.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

1-888-528-7876.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

214

Features

You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file(s).

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

PlayMode Menu Items

Normal Play

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.

Random All: Plays all files in random order.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

215

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Features

Press the (pick-up) button on the steering

wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio

is playing.

2Playing Bluetooth® Audio P. 211

Press the (hang-up) button to end the call

and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

■Switching to HFL

1Switching to HFL

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the

pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

216

Features

Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or

ON (w.

Use the interface dial or AUDIO button to

access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and

extended display for some functions.

Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll

through the available choices. Move

AUDIO button: Press to display the audio

system on the navigation screen.

Models with navigation system

1Audio System Basic Operation

These indications are used to show how to operate

the interface dial.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Move up to select.

Move down to select.

Move left to select.

Move right to select.

Press the MODE, (+, (-, or button on the

steering wheel to change any audio setting.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 217

Interface Dial

AUDIO Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

your selection.

the interface dial and press to set

217

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio Remote Controls

Features

Audio Remote Controls

Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.

MODE Button

Cycles through the audio modes as follows:

FM1FM2AMXM1XM2CD

HDDAUX

VOL Button

Press : Increases the volume.

Press : Decreases the volume.

CH Button

•When listening to the radio

Press (+: Selects the next preset radio station.

Press (-: Selects the previous preset radio station.

Press and hold (+: Selects the next strong station.

Press and hold (-: Selects the previous strong station.

•When listening to a CD, HDD, iPod® or USB flash drive

Press (+: Skips to the next song.

Press (-: Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

•When listening to a CD or HDD

Press and hold (+: Skips to the next folder/album.

Press and hold (-: Goes back to the previous folder/album.

1Audio Remote Controls

The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.

When in AUX mode, the following are operable from

the remote controls:

•iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB

adapter cable

•Bluetooth® Audio (with some phones only)

MODE Button

(Channel)

Button

VOL

(Volume)

Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

218

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Features

Adjusting the Sound

Press the AUDIO button, and move to

select AUDIO MENU. Rotate to select

Sound Setup, then press . Rotate to

scroll through the following choices:

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and

HIGH.

SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle

speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As

you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Dolby PL II signal processing creates multi-channel

surround sound from 2-channel stereo audio sources.

Dolby ProLogic II is available only in DISC (CD-DA,

MP3, WMA, AAC), XMr Radio, AUX (USB, iPodr,

AUX, Bluetoothr Audio), and HDD modes.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby, ProLogic, MLP Lossless, and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Interface Dial

AUDIO

Button

Speed-sensitive Volume

Compensation

Center*

Dolby ProLogic II*

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

219

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

Continued

Features

Playing the AM/FM Radio

FM Button

TITLE Button

Press to switch the RDS name on and off.

SCAN Button

Press to sample each of the strongest

stations on the selected band for 10

seconds. To turn off scan, press the

button again.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Pick a preset button and hold it

until you hear a beep.

To listen to a stored station, select a

band, then press the preset button.

SKIP Bar

Press to search up and down the

selected band for a station with a

strong signal.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system on

the navigation screen.

AM Button

Press to select a band.

CATEGORY Bar

Press either side to display and select

an RDS category.

Models without rear entertainment system

TUNE Knob

Turn to tune the radio frequency.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

220

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

Features

Models with rear entertainment system

TUNE Knob

Turn to tune the radio frequency.

SCAN Button

Press to sample each of the strongest

stations on the selected band for 10

seconds. To turn off scan, press the

button again.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and

off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Pick a preset button and hold it

until you hear a beep.

To listen to a stored station, select a

band, then press the preset button.

SKIP Bar

Press and hold to search up and down the

selected band for a station with a strong signal.

CATEGORY Bar

Press either side to display and

select an RDS category.

TITLE Button

Press to switch the RDS name on and off.

AM/FM Button

Press to select a band.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system on

the navigation screen.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 221

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

Features

Use the auto select feature to scan both bands and store the strongest station in

each preset.

1. Press the AUDIO button.

2. Move to select AUDIO MENU.

3. Rotate to select A.SEL, then press .

4. Rotate to select ON, then press .

To turn off auto select, rotate to select

OFF, then press . This restores the presets

you originally set.

■Auto Select

1Playing the AM/FM Radio

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating

stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the MODE button on the steering wheel.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 217

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into

the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you

store 6 stations each.

Auto Select function scans and stores up to six AM

stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal

into the preset button memory.

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,

you can manually store your preferred frequencies.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

222

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

Features

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■To find an RDS station from your selected program category

1. Press the AUDIO button.

2. Move to select AUDIO MENU.

3. Rotate to select RDS Search, then

4. Move or to select a search method

(Seek up, Seek down, Scan).

5. Rotate to select a category. Press .

■Radio text display

1. Press the AUDIO button.

2. Move to select AUDIO MENU.

3. Rotate to select Read Radio Text, then

press .

■Radio Data System (RDS)

RDS Category

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

223

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio

Continued

Features

Playing the XM® Radio

TITLE Button

Press and release to cycle the

display between the name, title,

and category.

(XM®) Button

Press to select XM® Radio, and to select the

XM1 or XM2 band.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to the

previous or next channel.

CATEGORY Bar

Press either side to display and

select an XMr Radio category.

TUNE Knob

Turn to tune a station.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a channel:

1. Tune to the selected channel.

2. Pick a preset button and hold it

until you hear a beep.

To listen to a stored channel, select

XM, then press the preset button.

SCAN Button

Press to sample all channels (in the

channel mode), or channels within a

category (in the category mode).

Each sampling continues for a few

seconds. Press SCAN again to cancel

scanning and continue listening to

the channel.

Models without rear entertainment system

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system on

the navigation screen.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

224

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio

Features

SCAN Button

Press to sample all channels (in the

channel mode), or channels within a

category (in the category mode).

Each sampling continues for a few

seconds. Press SCAN again to cancel

scanning and continue listening to the

channel.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a channel:

1. Select the channel.

2. Pick a preset button and hold it

until you hear a beep.

To listen to a stored channel, select

XM, then press the preset button.

SKIP Bar

Press to skip to the previous or next

channel.

CATEGORY Bar

Press either side to display and

select an XM® Radio category.

TITLE Button

Press and release to cycle the display

between the name, title, and category.

(XM®) Button

Press to select XM® radio, and to select the

XM1 or XM2 band. TUNE Knob

Turn to tune a station.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system on the

navigation screen.

Models with rear entertainment system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

225

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio

Features

1. Press the button.

2. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.

3. Rotate to select Mode. Press .

4. Rotate to select CH (channel mode) or CAT (category mode). Press .

5. Select a channel using the TUNE (), SKIP, CATEGORY, SCAN, or Preset

buttons.

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Channel List. Then

press .

3. Rotate to select a channel, then

■To Play the XM® Radio

■To Select a Channel from a List

1Playing the XM® Radio

In the channel mode, all available channels are

selectable. In the category mode, you can select a

channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

You can store 12 XM® stations in the preset buttons.

XM1 and XM2 let you store 6 stations each.

There may be instances when XM® Radio does not

broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This

does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

226

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Features

Playing a CD

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.

SCAN Button

You will get a 10-second sampling of each

song.

●Press to sample all tracks on the CD (all files

in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

●Press two times to sample the first file in

each of the main folders (MP3, WMA, or

AAC).

●To turn off scan, press and hold the button.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the CD

slot.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system on

the navigation screen.

CD Button

Press to play a CD.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

Models without rear entertainment system

TITLE Button

Press to display the text data on a CD

(if it was recorded with text data).

SKIP Bar

Press or to change tracks (files in

MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Press and hold to move rapidly within a

track/file. CATEGORY Bar

Press (+ to skip to the next folder, and (- to

skip to the beginning of the previous folder in

MP3, WMA or AAC.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

227

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Continued

Features

SCAN Button

You will get a 10-second sampling of each song.

●Press to sample all tracks on the CD (all files in

the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

●Press two times to sample the first file in each

of the main folders (MP3, WMA, or AAC).

●To turn off scan, press and hold the button.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change tracks (files in MP3,

WMA or AAC).

Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/

file.

TITLE Button

Press to display the text data on a CD (if it

was recorded with text data).

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system on

the navigation screen.

Models with rear entertainment system

CD Button

Press to play a CD CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

CATEGORY Bar

Press (+ to skip to the next folder, and (- to

skip to the beginning of the previous folder in

MP3, WMA or AAC.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

228

Features

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

FOLDER LIST.

2. Rotate to select a folder.

3. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Interface Dial

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

1Playing a CD

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can

cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays UNSUPPORTED, then

skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following

circumstances:

•When you select a new folder, file, or track.

•When you change the audio mode to CD.

•When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,

the system reloads the CD automatically after several

seconds.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

229

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Features

You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file.

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or

Scan, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or Scan, then press .

3. Rotate to select OFF, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

OFF

TRACK REPEAT: Repeats the current track/file.

FOLDER REPEAT (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files

in the current folder.

FOLDER RANDOM (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files

in the current folder in random order.

TRACK RANDOM: Plays all tracks/files in random

order.

TRACK SCAN: Samples all track/file(s).

FOLDER SCAN (MP3/WMA/AAC): Samples the first

file in each folder.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

230

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

The songs on music CDs can be recorded to the built-in HDD. You can then play the songs directly from your vehicle’s audio system.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and

off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

HDD Button

Press to play tracks stored on the HDD.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system on the

navigation screen.

Models without rear entertainment system

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change tracks.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.

CATEGORY Bar

Press (+ to skip to the next track list,

and (- to skip to the beginning of the

previous track list.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

231

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Continued

Features

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change tracks.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system on the

navigation screen.

Models with rear entertainment system

HDD Button

Press to play tracks stored on the HDD.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

CATEGORY Bar

Press (+ to skip to the next track list, and

(- to skip to the beginning of the previous

track list.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

232

Features

■If the CD is played in the audio unit for the first time

The songs on music CDs are automatically

recorded to HDD by factory default.

uThe recording icon appears while the CD

is being recorded.

■Stopping recording

1. Move to select AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Cancel Rec to HDD, then press .

■Recording a Music CD to HDD

1Recording a Music CD to HDD

You can store up to 9999 tracks.

The system supports the recording function from the

standard CD-DA only.

2Recommended CDs P. 273

The system does not support the CD-DA with copy

protection.

Gracenote® searches for the title information for the

CD you have recorded to the HDD. If the information

is found, song titles are displayed.

If you turn off the ignition switch while recording a

CD, there may be pauses between songs when you

playback from the HDD.

Forward/rewind, repeat, random and scan functions

are not available during recording. You can listen to

tracks from other album lists while recording.

There is no compensation offered in the case of

unsuccessful recording of audio data or the loss of

audio data due to any cause whatsoever.

Album Number

Current Recording Track Number

Recording Icon

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 233

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing HDD.

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or

Scan, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or Scan, then press .

3. Rotate to select OFF, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode for HDD

1How to Select a Play Mode for HDD

Play Mode Menu Items

OFF

TRACK REPEAT: Repeats the current track.

TRACK SCAN: Samples all tracks on the HDD.

TRACK RANDOM: Plays all tracks on the HDD in

random order.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

234

Features

■Recording a CD Manually

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select HDD Setup, then

3. Rotate to select CD Recording, then

press .

4. Rotate to select MANUAL, then

5. Move to select RETURN.

6. Rotate to select Rec to HDD. Press .

uTo cancel recording, rotate to select

Cancel Rec to HDD. Press .

■HDD Setup

1HDD Setup

HDD Setup menu items

CD Recording:

2Recording a CD Manually P. 200

Gracenote Info. Update:

2To update Gracenote® Album Info P. 202

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

Continued 235

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

■To update Gracenote® Album Info

1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot that includes the update.

2. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.

3. Rotate to select HDD Setup.

4. Rotate to select Gracenote Info. Update, then press .

5. Rotate to select USB or DISC update source media, then press .

6. Rotate to select Yes. Press to start updating.

7. Rotate to select OK, on the confirmation screen. Press .

1To update Gracenote® Album Info

To acquire updated files:

Consult a dealer

US: Visit www.honda.com.

Canada: Visit www.honda.ca.

Once you perform an update, any information you

edited before will be overwritten or erased.

2Gracenote® End User License Agreement

P. 476

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

236

Features

Search for music recorded to HDD using six different methods.

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

MUSIC SEARCH.

2. Rotate to select an item. Press .

uMove or to select alphabetical

tabs on some screens.

uThe first track begins playing.

■Searching for Music

1Searching for Music

Albums, Artists, and Tracks display lists in

alphabetical order. Ripped Date displays albums in

chronological order.

You can also search for music on the HDD through

voice commands using SBV.

RANDOM ALL TRACKS

Move to select RANDOM ALL TRACKS to shuffle

the playback of all tracks that have been recorded to

HDD.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 237

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

Add a track from any playlist to one of the six user playlists.

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Add to Playlist, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a playlist. Press .

uThe track is added to the end of the

playlist.

Change the playlist name, track title, artist name, genre, and track order of the

current playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Edit Music Info., then

press .

3. Rotate to select an item. Press .

■Adding a Track to a User Playlist

1Adding a Track to a User Playlist

The maximum number of songs in each of the six

user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites

the oldest songs.

Adding a track from a user playlist into the same user

playlist will cause the track to appear twice in the

playlist.

■Editing a Playlist

1Editing a Playlist

Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the

album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.

Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a

user playlist does not remove the playlist folder.

The folder retains the playlist name and artist

information.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

238

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

The following items are available, depending on the type of playlist:

•Edit Artist Name: Enter a new artist name. Move to select OK when finished.

Then, select whether to apply the new artist name to the album (playlist) and all

tracks, the current track only, all tracks, or the album (playlist) only.

•Edit Playlist Name (user playlists): Enter a new playlist name. Move to select

OK when finished.

•Edit Album Name (original playlists): Enter a new album name. Move to select

OK when finished.

•Edit Track Name: Enter a new track name. Move to select OK when finished.

•Edit Genre: Select a new genre. Then select the original playlist to apply

•Edit Track Order (user playlists): Select the track to move, and then select

than one track. Move to select OK

•Delete Playlist: Deletes the user playlist. Rotate to select Yes at the

confirmation prompt to delete the playlist.

•Delete Album: Deletes the original playlist. Rotate to select Yes at the

confirmation prompt to delete the album.

•Delete Track: Deletes the current track. Rotate to select Yes at the

confirmation prompt to delete the current track.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

the genre.

when finished.

the new location. Repeat to move more

239

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

Display the music information (album name, artist name, genre) for an album

(original playlist).

uGracenoter searches for the information

of the currently selected album (original

playlist).

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Add to Get Music

Info., then press .

3. Rotate to select an album. Press .

uThe information is displayed.

■Displaying Music Information

1Displaying Music Information

The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with

a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.

Each album CD counts as an original playlist.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

240

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Features

Playing an iPod®

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press the USB/AUX button.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 173

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select iPod® (if connected).

Models without rear entertainment system

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system

on the navigation screen.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

241

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Continued

Features

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system

on the navigation screen.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select iPod® (if connected).

Models with rear entertainment system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

242

Features

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

MUSIC SEARCH.

2. Rotate to select a menu.

3. Press to display the items on that menu.

4. Rotate to select an item, then press .

■How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu

1Playing an iPod®

Available operating functions vary on models or

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio display.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 268

iPod® Menu

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

243

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Features

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Repeat or Shuffle,

then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Repeat or Shuffle,

then press .

3. Rotate to select OFF, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

OFF

Shuffle: Plays all available files in a selected list

(playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or

composers) in random order.

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

Repeat: Repeats the current track.

Play Mode Items

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

244

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Features

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the USB/AUX button.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 173

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system on

the navigation screen.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select USB flash drive (if

connected).

Models without rear entertainment system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

245

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Continued

Features

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio system on

the navigation screen.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select USB flash drive (if

connected).

Models with rear entertainment system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

246

Features

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

FOLDER LIST.

2. Rotate to select a folder.

3. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

2General Information on the Audio System

P. 272

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights

management (DRM) are not played.

The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and

then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio display.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 268

RANDOM ALL TRACKS

Move to select RANDOM ALL TRACKS to shuffle

the playback of all tracks on the USB flash drive.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

247

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Features

You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or

Scan, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select

AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Repeat, Random, or

Scan, then press .

3. Rotate to select OFF, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

OFF

TRACK REPEAT: Repeats the current file.

FOLDER REPEAT: Repeats all files in the current

folder.

FOLDER RANDOM: Plays all files in the current

folder in random order.

TRACK RANDOM: Plays all files in random order.

TRACK SCAN: Samples all files in the current folder.

FOLDER SCAN (MP3/WMA/AAC): Samples the first

file in each folder.

Play Mode Items

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

248

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Features

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your

Bluetooth®-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and linked to the vehicle's

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2Phone Setup P. 305

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming

audio capabilities are compatible with the system.

For a list of compatible phones:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data

device functions while driving.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,

there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

VOL/ (Volume/

Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio

system on and off.

Turn to adjust the

volume.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio

system on the navigation

screen.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select

Bluetooth® Audio.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change

files.

Models without rear entertainment system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

1-888-528-7876.

249

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Continued

Features

VOL/ (Volume/

Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio

system on and off.

Turn to adjust the

volume.

AUDIO Button

Press to display the audio

system on the navigation

screen.

USB/AUX Button

Press to select

Bluetooth® Audio.

SKIP Bar

Press or to

change files.

Models with rear entertainment system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

250

Features

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and

linked to HFL.

2. Press the USB/AUX button.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-

compatible phone, which is not compatible

for Bluetooth® Audio, may be already linked.

■To pause or resume a file

1. Press the AUDIO button, move to select AUDIO MENU.

2. Rotate to select Resume/Pause, then press .

Each time you press , the setting switches between Pause and Resume.

Press the (pick-up) button on the steering

wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio

is playing.

2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 301

Press the (hang-up) button to end the call

and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your

phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating

instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some

phones.

If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input

jack, you may need to press the USB/AUX button

repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

from your phone.

■Switching to HFL

1Switching to HFL

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the

pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

251

Continued

Features

Rear Entertainment System*

Allows the rear passengers to enjoy a different entertainment source, such as DVD,

CD, CD Library*, HDD*, and radio, than the front passengers.

The rear seat passengers can listen to audio from the rear entertainment system by

a wireless headphone that comes with your vehicle.

To turn on the switch: Pivot the left

earpiece outward.

To adjust the volume: Turn the dial at the

bottom of the right earpiece.

■Wireless Headphones

1Rear Entertainment System*

NOTICE

This vehicle’s overhead mounted video display, if so

equipped, includes mercury-containing components.

Upon removal, please reuse, recycle, or dispose of as

hazardous waste.

The system also allows for auxiliary inputs from

standard video games. The jacks are on the back of

the center console compartment.

V = Video jack

L = Left audio jack

R = Right audio jack

Auxiliary Input Jacks

1Wireless Headphones

Your vehicle comes with two wireless headphones.

Wear the headphone correctly with the earpiece

marked with L goes to your left ear and R goes to

your right ear.

Wearing the headphone backward may affect the

audio reception.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

252

Features

Press the OPEN button and pull down

the screen to the first or second detent

until it latches.

Operating the System

To operate the system, turn the ignition switch to ON (w or ACCESSORY (q. Press

the button to turn on the system (indicator on).

■ button on the front panel

When you press the button (indicator

on), the beeper sounds twice, and the front

display changes to what is displayed on the

rear overhead screen.

The audio from the front speakers switches to

the audio played in the rear.

■Overhead Screen

1 Overhead Screen

NOTICE

This vehicle’s overhead mounted video display, if so

equipped, includes mercury-containing components.

Upon removal, please reuse, recycle, or dispose of as

hazardous waste.

You can use the rear control panel as a remote. Press

the RELEASE button to detach it.

Overhead Screen

1 Operating the System

If you do not operate the system from the front panel

for more than 20 seconds, the indicator in the

button goes off, and the front display returns to what

has previously been displayed.

REAR POWER

Button

REAR SOURCE

Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

253

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

Continued

Features

■System Controls and Menus for DVD

(Power) Button

Press to turn on the system.

DVD Button

Press to watch a DVD.

(Light) Button

Press to illuminate the buttons and bars for a few seconds.

SKIP Buttons

Press or to change chapters.

(Play/Pause) Button

Press to pause or play a DVD.

TITLE/SCROLL Button

Press to display the

status of the DVD

that is currently

playing.

MENU Button

The following options appear when you

play a DVD and press the MENU button:

Top Menu

Play Mode Audio

Subtitle

Angle

Search Title

Chapter

Repeat

SETUP Button

The following options appear when you play a DVD and

press the SETUP button:

Disp Adjust

( P. 259)

Brightness

Contrast

Black Level

Color

CANCEL Button

Press to go back to the

previous display or operation.

3, 4, , and ENT Buttons

Use 3, 4, , or to highlight a

menu item, and press the ENT Button

to make a selection.

Tint

Normal

Wide

Zoom

Full

Aspect Ratio

( P. 259)

PERSONAL SURROUND ( P. 259)

Language ( P. 259)

Rewind Button

Press and hold to reverse to chapters.

Fast-forward Button

Press and hold to fast forward to chapters.

NumInput

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

254

Features

■Playing a DVD

•Insert a DVD into the lower slot of the front audio unit.

uThe system automatically starts the DVD.

•To fast forward, press and hold the (SKIP) bar, and to reverse, press and hold

the bar on the front panel.

•To go to the next chapter, press the bar, and to go to the beginning of the

current chapter, press the bar on the front panel. Quickly press the bar

twice to go to the previous chapter.

■DVD setup from the front panel

Press the button on the front panel

while a DVD is playing and display REAR

MENU in front. Rotate to select DVD

Setup, then press .

Setting up Audio:

1. Rotate to select Audio, then press .

2. Rotate to select a language for audio that is available on the DVD, then

Setting up Subtitle:

1. Rotate to select Subtitle, then press .

2. Rotate to select a subtitle language that is available on the DVD.

1Playing a DVD

DVD is available for the rear seat passenger only.

If you have turned off the Auto Play feature, press the

(play) button on the front panel or remote.

Models without navigation system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

* Not available on all models

255

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

Continued

Features

Auto Play On:

1. Rotate to select Auto Play On, then press .

2. The check mark disappears, and the auto play feature turns off.

uWith this feature off, the DVD does not automatically start playing when the

disc is inserted. Press button to play.

Title/Chapter Search:

1. Rotate to select Title Search or Chapter Search, then press .

2. Rotate to select a title or chapter number, then press .

Press the button on the front panel

while a DVD is playing. Rotate to select

DVD Setup, then press .

Title/Chapter Search:

1. Rotate to select Title Search or Chapter Search, then press .

2. Rotate to select a title or chapter number, then press .

Setting up Audio:

1. Rotate to select Audio, then press .

2. Rotate to select a language for audio that is available on the DVD, then

Models with navigation system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

* Not available on all models

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

256

Features

Setting up Subtitle:

1. Rotate to select Subtitle, then press .

2. Rotate to select a subtitle language that is available on the DVD.

Setting up Repeat:

1. Rotate to select Repeat, then press .

2. Rotate to select the icon in the center to repeat the current chapter, the icon

on the right to repeat the current title, or OFF to turn off repeat.

Auto Play:

1. Rotate to select Auto Play, then press .

2. Rotate to select OFF or ON, then press .

uWith this feature off, the DVD does not automatically start playing when the

disc is inserted. Press button to play.

■TITLE/SCROLL button on the remote

Press the TITLE/SCROLL button while the DVD is playing to see the current status of

title, chapter, elapsed time, angle, subtitle, audio, and sound characteristics.

1TITLE/SCROLL button on the remote

Press the TITLE/SCROLL button again to return.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

257

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

Continued

Features

■MENU button on the remote

Press the MENU button while the DVD is

playing to see the available options. Use the

and buttons to highlight the option and

then press the ENT button.

Top Menu:

The top page of the DVD’s title menu appears. The title menu also appears when

you press the MENU button while the DVD is in the slot not playing. Press the

CANCEL or MENU button to return.

Menu:

The DVD’s title menu appears.

Play Mode:

You can change the following three settings:

Audio - Select a language for audio that is available on the DVD. The sound

characteristics (Dolby Digital, LPCM, MPEG Audio, etc) of that audio is also

displayed.

Subtitle - Select a subtitle that is available on the DVD.

Angle - Select a view angle that is available on the DVD. If the DVD currently playing

does not carry multiple angles, only one option Angle 1 comes on. Press the

CANCEL or MENU button to return. Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

258

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

Features

Search:

You can search for a DVD segment from the following methods.

Title Search - Select the title you want to play.

Chapter Search - Select the chapter you want to play.

NumInput:

Enter a two digit number, if issued to the DVD, to find the segment you want to start

to play.

1. Select NumInput to go to the number input screen.

2. Use the 3, 4, , and buttons to input numbers.

uIf you want to delete a number, select DEL.

3. The cursor automatically goes to ENT after you input two digits. Press the ENT

button to enter.

Repeat:

Highlight this option and press the ENT button to change the repeat mode from

chapter repeat and title repeat, to repeat off.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

Continued 259

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

Features

■SETUP button on the remote

Press the SETUP button while the DVD is

playing to see the available options. Use the

and buttons to highlight the option and

then press ENT.

Disp Adjust:

You can adjust the overhead screen’s Brightness, Contrast, Black Level, Tint, and

Color. To return to the default display setting, select Reset.

After you make all the adjustments, the screen goes back to the top SETUP screen,

or press the CANCEL button to return.

Aspect Ratio:

You can select the screen mode with a different aspect ratio from Normal, Wide,

Zoom, and Full. After you select the mode, it takes about one second to return to

the play mode with the selected ratio.

PERSONAL SURROUND:

You can select the sound effect mode that fits the DVD’s audio source from Music,

Cinema, and Voice. Select Off to turn this feature off.

Language:

You can select the display language from English, French, and Spanish.

1SETUP button on the remote

Some DVD formats do not allow for some of the

setting adjustments.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

260

Features

Initial Settings -

Press the SETUP button to configure the initial Language, Dynamic Range, and

Angle Mark settings before playing a DVD.

Language Settings:

Select the language for the DVD’s displayed menus (Menu Language), the DVD’s

audio (Audio Language), and the DVD’s subtitle (Subtitle Language).

1. Select the language setting.

2. Select the language from English, French, Spanish, Arabic, German, Italian,

Dutch, Chinese, Korean, Thai, Japanese, and other.

3. If you select other, you need to enter the four digit language code to configure

the language that is not listed. Select Yes to go to the number input screen.

uTo return to the Language Settings screen, select No.

4. Press the ENT button each time you input a digit.

uIf you want to delete a number, select DEL.

5. The cursor automatically goes to ENT after you input four digits. Press the ENT

button to command.

Dynamic Range:

This feature reduces the difference between the loud and quiet sound levels. Select

ON or OFF.

Angle Mark:

You can select whether to display the angle mark appearing in the upper right

corner of the screen when you change the view angle while the DVD is playing.

Select ON or OFF.

When the DVD is not playing

1SETUP button on the remote

Initial Settings:

The prior language varies by disc. You may not be

able to configure your selected language setting.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

261

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

Continued

Features

■System Controls and Menus for Audio

(Power) Button

Press to turn on the system.

AUX Button

Press to use a USB, iPod, auxiliary video (rear), or auxiliary audio (front).

(Light) Button

Press to illuminate the buttons and bars for a few seconds.

SKIP Buttons

2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 175

(Play/Pause) Button

Press to pause a playing CD.

SCROLL Button

Press to switch search mode on XM radio, and scroll titles on CD.

CANCEL Button

Press to go back to the previous

display or operation.

3,4, , and ENT Buttons

Use 3, 4, , or to highlight a

menu item, and press the ENT Button

to make a selection.

CD/CDL Button*

Press to listen to a CD or CD library.

AM/FM Button

Press to listen to

AM or FM radio.

SETUP Button

2 SETUP button on the remote P. 259

XM Button

Press to listen

to XM radio.

MENU Button

Press to display audio menu for AM/FM radio, XM radio, or CD on the overhead screen.

CD/HDD Button*

Press to listen to a CD or hard disc drive.

Rewind Button

Press and hold to reverse the track.

Fast-forward Button

Press and hold to fast-forward the track.

* Not available on all models

P. 216

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

262

Features

■Playing AM/FM radio in the rear

Press the AM/FM button.

When you press the MENU button while the radio is playing, the audio menu

appears on the overhead screen. The available functions are the same as those of

the front audio system. The SKIP button on the control panel works the same as the

SKIP bar on the front panel for AM/FM radio operation.

2Playing the AM/FM Radio P. 186

■Playing XM radio in the rear

Press the XM button.

When you press the MENU button while the radio is playing, the audio menu

appears on the overhead screen. The available functions are the same as those of

the front audio system. The SKIP button on the control panel works the same as the

SKIP bar on the front panel for XM radio operation.

2Playing the XM® Radio* P. 190

To change the mode between category and channel, press and hold the

TITLE/SCROLL button for five seconds.

1System Controls and Menus for Audio

If you press the button on the front panel, you

can operate the rear entertainment system from the

front display.

2 button on the front panel P. 252

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

263

uuRear Entertainment System*uOperating the System

Features

■Playing a CD, CD Library*, and Hard disc drive*

Press the CD/CDL or CD/HDD button.

The available options appear on the overhead screen are Repeat, Random, and

Scan. These functions are the same as those of the front audio system.

2Playing a CD P. 193

2Playing CD Library P. 197

2Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio P. 230

To scroll your audio data title, press the TITLE/SCROLL button.

■Playing iPod® and a USB flash drive

Press the AUX button.

The available options appear on the overhead screen are Repeat, Random, and

Scan. These functions are the same as those of the front audio system.

2Playing an iPod® P. 203

2Playing a USB Flash Drive P. 207

To scroll your audio data title, press the TITLE/SCROLL button.

1System Controls and Menus for Audio

You can also insert an audio CD compatible with the

system, or recorded in MP3/WMA/AAC formats into

the lower slot and play. The front passengers can

listen to the same CD, or select another audio source.

2Playable Discs P. 265

2Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats

P. 264

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

264

uuRear Entertainment System*uAudio Sources for Front and Rear Seats

Features

Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats

The table shows the possible audio source combinations of the front audio system

and rear entertainment system’s simultaneous use.

*1: The front seat passengers are only able to hear the DVD’s sound from the front speakers.

*2:There are two cases. Two different CDs can be played, one for the front seats, and the other for the

rear seats if the upper and lower slots are used. If only one slot is used, the front and rear seats can

share the same audio source.

Front AM/FM

Radio

Radio CD CD

Library HDD DVD*1 USB

iPod®

Rear

AM/FM

Radio Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

XM Radio Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

CD Yes Yes Yes*2 No Yes Yes Yes

CD Library Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

HDD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

DVD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

USB iPod®Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

1Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats

Yes: These audio sources are simultaneously playable.

No: These audio sources are not simultaneously

playable.

Home

QRG

Index

* Not available on all models

TOC

265

uuRear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs

Features

Playable Discs

The discs that come with these labels can be

played in your vehicle’s rear entertainment

system.

Also look for the region code of 1 or ALL on

the package or jacket on the disc.

DVD-ROMs are not playable in this unit.

1Playable Discs

This product incorporates copyright protection

technology that is protected by U.S. patents and

other intellectual property rights.

Use of this copyright protection technology must be

authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home

and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise

authorized by Macrovision.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent’s:

5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;

6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents

issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are

registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol

Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby, Pro Logic, MLP Lossless and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

266

Features

Audio Error Messages

CD Player

If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.

Error Message Cause Solution

UNSUPPORTED FILE Track/file format not supported ●Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file

plays automatically.

CHECK DISC Disc error ●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.

2Protecting CDs P. 274

Models without navigation system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

267

uuAudio Error MessagesuCD Player

Features

Error Message Cause Solution

BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK

OWNERS MANUAL Servo error ●Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the

error message is cleared.

●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the

disc again.

2Recommended CDs P. 273

●If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out

the disc.

●Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with

the first disc.

●If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,

contact a dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK

OWNERS MANUAL PUSH

EJECT

Mechanical error

MECH ERROR Mechanical error

CHECK DISC

Focus error

Disc violates copyright

Disc not supported

CHECK DISC LOAD Load error

UNSUPPORTED Track format not supported ●Current track will be skipped. The next supported track plays

automatically.

HEAT ERROR High temperature ●Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until

the error message is cleared.

Models with navigation system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

268

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive

Features

iPod®/USB Flash Drive

If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error

error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message Solution

USB ERROR Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the

USB adapter unit.

BAD USB DEVICE PLEASE

CHECK OWNERS MANUAL

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system

off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

NO SONG Appears when the iPod® is empty. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

UNSUPPORTED VER Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,

update the iPod® software to the newer version.

Retry Connection Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.

UNPLAYABLE FILE Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message

appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.

No Song Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash

drive. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is

connected, reconnect the device.

Models without navigation system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

269

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPodr

Features

iPodr

Error Message Cause Solution

UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported

iPodr is connected. Update the iPodr software to the latest version.

CONNECT RETRY Appears when the iPodr cannot

be authenticated. Reconnect the iPodr.

NO SONG Appears when there are no

tracks in the iPodr.Store tracks in the iPodr.

Models with navigation system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

270

uuAudio Error MessagesuUSB Flash Drive

Features

USB Flash Drive

Error Message Cause Solution

FILE ERROR The system cannot read the

track(s).

Check the tracks in the USB flash drive. There is a possibility that the

tracks have been damaged.

UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported

device is connected.

If it appears when a supported device is connected, reconnect the

device.

UNPLAYABLE FILE

Appears when the tracks in the

USB flash drive are DRM or an

unsupported format.

This error message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next

song.

NO SONG

Appears when the USB flash

drive is empty or there are no

tracks in MP3, WMA, or AAC

format in the drive.

Save tracks in MP3, WMA, or AAC format in the USB flash drive.

BAD USB DEVICE PLEASE

CHECK OWNER'S MANUAL

Appears when the overcurrent

protection feature of the system

stops supplying power to USB

because an incompatible device

is connected.

Disconnect the device. Turn the audio system off, and turn it on

again.

Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

ERROR Appears when the Internal USB

ROM error occurs. Try a different USB flash drive.

Models with navigation system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

271

uuAudio Error MessagesuDVD Player Error Messages

Features

DVD Player Error Messages

Error Message Cause Solution

CHECK DISC FOCUS Error Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc. Check for an error

indication. Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear or

the disc cannot removed, consult a dealer.

Mech Error Mechanical Error

CHECK REGION Invalid region code The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disc

compatible with this system.

UNSUPPORTED FILE DVD format not supported

Models with rear entertainment system

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

272

Features

General Information on the Audio System

XM® Radio Service*

1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription.

To see the ID on the display: Turn the selector knob until 0 appears.

2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM®

website to subscribe.

Press the (XM®) button and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the

service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

LOADING: XM® is loading the audio or program information.

Ch Off Air: The channel is not currently broadcasting.

Ch Unauthorized: The encryption code is being updated. Channels 0 and 1 still

work normally.

NO SIGNAL: The signal is too weak in the current location.

Ch Unavailable: No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your

subscription, or the artist or title information is unavailable.

CHECK ANTENNA: There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

■Subscribing to XM® Radio

■Receiving XM® Radio

■XM® Radio Display Messages

1Subscribing to XM® Radio

Contact Information for XM

Radio:

US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or

Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or

1Receiving XM® Radio

The XM

satellites are in orbit over the equator,

therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause

satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are

more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and

mountains the farther north you travel from the

equator.

You may experience reception problems under the

following circumstances:

•In a location with an obstruction to the south of

your vehicle.

•In tunnels

•On the lower level of a multi-tiered road

•Large items carried on the roof rack

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

1-877-209-0079

1-800-852-9696

273

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

Continued

Features

Recommended CDs

•Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.

•Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.

•Play only standard round-shaped CDs.

•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.

•Some versions of MP3, WMA or AAC formats may be unsupported.

1Recommended CDs

A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded

under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not

play either.

■CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files

The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

274

Features

■Protecting CDs

Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:

•Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.

•When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.

•Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.

•Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.

•Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.

•Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.

•Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.

1Protecting CDs

NOTICE

Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside

and damage the audio unit.

Examples:

●Damaged CDs

Bubbled/

Wrinkled

With Label/

Sticker

Using

Printer Label

Kit

Sealed With Plastic Ring

●Poor quality

CDs

Chipped/

Cracked

Warped Burrs

●Small CDs

3-inch

(8-cm)

●Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and

excessively thick CDs

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

275

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives

Features

Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives

•Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.

•Some digital audio players may not be compatible.

•Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.

•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.

•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

■iPod® Model Compatibility

Model

iPod classic ® 80GB/160GB

iPod classic ® 120GB

iPod classic ® 160GB (launch in 2009)

iPod ® (5th generation)

iPod nano ®

iPod touch ®

■USB Flash Drives

1iPod® Model Compatibility

This system may not work with all software versions

of these devices.

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored

order. This order may be different from the order

displayed on your PC or device.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

276

Features

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three

remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or

home security systems.

Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that

the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety

information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the

way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage

Training HomeLink

If you have not trained any of the buttons in

HomeLink before, you should erase any

previously learned codes. To do this:

•Press and hold the two outside buttons for

about 20 seconds, until the red indicator

blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to

step 1.

•If you are training the second or third

button, go directly to step 1.

■Important Safety Precautions

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson

Controls., Inc.

Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage

door opener, confirm that the opener has an external

entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic

eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it

does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

Red Indicator

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

door's path.

277

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

Features

■Training a Button

1 Training a Button

Retraining a Button

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a

new device, you do not have to erase all button

memory. You can replace the existing memory code

using this procedure.

Erasing Codes

To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside

buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink

(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes

before selling the vehicle.

If you have any problems, see the device’s

instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call

HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until

the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.

2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and follow

steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”

Indicator remains on

for about 25 secs.

Standard transmitter

Indicator blinks rapidly for

two secs, then remains on

for about 23 secs.

Rolling code transmitter

1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink

button you want to program.

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on

the remote transmitter.

Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) blink after 10 secs?

3. Press and hold the

programmed HomeLink button

for about a sec.

Does the device (garage door

opener) work?

Training

Complete

4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

5. Press and hold the HomeLink

button again.

The remote-controlled device

should operate.

Training Complete

a. Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink

button at the same time. Then, while continuing to

hold the HomeLink button, press and release the

button on the remote every 2 secs.

Does the LED blink within 20 secs?

a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the “learn”

button on the remote-controlled device (e.g.

garage door opener).

b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed

HomeLink button for 2 secs.

YES

HomeLink LED

is on.

HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,

then remains on.

YES

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

278

Features

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using

your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an

incoming call.

(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call.

(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.

(Back) button: Press to cancel a command.

PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.

Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

■HFL Buttons

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell

phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing

procedures, and special feature capabilities:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call

Voice control tips

•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere

with the microphone.

•Press and release the button when you want to

call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak

clearly and naturally after a beep.

•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,

the command may be misinterpreted.

•To change the volume level, use the audio system's

volume knob or the remote audio controls on the

steering wheel.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Models without navigation system

Talk Button

Volume up

Microphone

Hang-up Button

Pick-up

Button Volume down

Selector

Knob

PHONE

Button

Back Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

1-888-528-7876.

279

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

Features

The display shows call status and phone

information.

■HFL Status Display

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any

use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is

under license. Other trademarks and trade names are

those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio

system when it is playing. It will resume when the call

is ended.

Signal Strength

HFL Mode

Battery Level

Status

Roam Status

Call Name

Bluetooth Indicator

Comes on when your

phone is connected to

HFL.

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the display varies

between phone models.

You can change the system language to English,

French, or Spanish.

2Customized Features P. 90

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

280

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

HFL Menus

The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle

is parked.

PHONE

Speed Dial

Call History*1

Dialed Calls

Dial

Phonebook*1

Received Calls

Missed Calls

Display your speed dial entry lists.

(up to 20 entries per paired phone)

Display the menu for

an alphabetical search

in the paired phone’s

phonebook.

Enter a phone number to dial.

Display the last 20

incoming calls.

Display the last 20

outgoing calls.

Display the last 20

missed calls.

All Calls

Display the last 20

incoming, outgoing,

or missed calls.

Alphabet Search

All Listings Display the paired

phone’s phonebook.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

281

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

Phone Setup Connection Add a New Phone

Connect

Disconnect

Delete

Pair a phone to the system.

Connect a phone to the system.

Disconnect a paired phone from

the system.

Delete a previously paired phone.

Bluetooth PIN Create a Bluetooth PIN number for a

paired phone.

Redial Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

282

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Edit Speed Dial Store Speed Dial

Delete Speed Dial

Store Voice Tag

Delete Voice Tag

Select a number from the Call

History, phonebook, or manual

entry to store as a speed dial

number.

Delete a previously stored speed dial

number.

Create a voice tag for a speed dial

number.

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial

number.

Security Code Create a security code number for a paired phone.

Auto Answer

Auto Transfer

Set incoming calls to be automatically answered.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone

to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

System Clear Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook

entries, speed dials, and security codes.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 283

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

3. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then press .

uHFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device.

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

uIf your phone doesn’t appear, select

Phone Not Found? and search for

Bluetooth devices using your phone.

From your phone, select

HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to

input on your phone.

When your phone prompts you, input the

four-digit pairing code.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

■Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to

HFL before you can make and receive hands-free

calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving.

•Up to six phones can be paired.

•Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is

paired to HFL.

•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found

by the system within three minutes, the system will

time out and returns to idle.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

284

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Connection, then

4. Rotate to select Add New Phone, then

press .

5. Rotate to select Empty (Add New),

then press .

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

285

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

6. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then press .

uHFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device.

7. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

uIf your phone doesn’t appear, select

Phone Not Found? and search for

Bluetooth devices using your phone.

From your phone, select

HandsFreeLink.

8. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to

input on your phone.

When your phone prompts you, input the

four-digit pairing code.

9. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

286

Features

■To change the Bluetooth PIN setting

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

uRotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

2. Rotate to select Connection, then

3. Rotate to select Bluetooth PIN, then

press .

4. Rotate to select Fixed PIN or Random

PIN, then press .

5. If you select Fixed PIN, enter a new

Bluetooth PIN.

uRotate to select, then press .

Rotate to select , then press to

delete.

1To change the Bluetooth PIN setting

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the

setting.

To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the

current code, then enter a new one.

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you

pair a phone, select Random.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

287

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■To delete a paired phone

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Connection, then Delete.

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

delete, then press .

uThe Bluetooth icon indicates the

currently linked phone.

4. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

uYou will receive a notification on the

screen if it is successful.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

288

Features

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Security

Code.

3. Select a phone you want to add a security

code to.

uRotate to select a phone you want to

add a security code to, then press .

4. Enter a new four-digit number.

uRotate to select, then press .

Rotate to select , then press to

delete.

If the phone name you selected is security

code protected the speed dial list becomes

■To Create a Security Code

1To Create a Security Code

In the phone is already security code protected, you

need to enter the current security code before

clearing the code or creating a new one.

Speed Dial List When

Security Code-Protected

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

289

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

You can choose when the HFL system automatically answers incoming calls.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Auto

Answer.

3. Rotate to select a mode you want, then

press .

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically

transferred to HFL.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Auto

Transfer.

3. Press to select On or Off.

uThe check box is checked when Auto

Transfer On is selected. Select Auto

Transfer On again to turn it off.

■Automatic Answering

■Automatic Transferring

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

290

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Security codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, and all

imported phonebook data are erased.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select System

Clear.

3. You will receive a notification message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

4. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen.

■To Clear the System

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 291

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are

automatically imported to HFL.

■Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

When you select a person from the list in the cellular

phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.

The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored

for that name.

If a name has four or more numbers, ∙∙∙ appears

instead of category icons.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the

category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Pref

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Car

Fax

Message

Other

Voice

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

292

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial, then Store Speed Dial.

3. Rotate to select No Entry, then

4. Rotate to select a place to choose a

number from, then press .

By Phonebook:

uSelect a number from the linked cell

phone’s imported phonebook.

By Call History:

uSelect a number from the call history.

By Manual Entry:

uInput the number manually.

5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,

you are asked to create a voice tag for the

number. Rotate to select Yes or No,

then press .

6. Using the button, follow the prompts to

say the name for the speed dial entry.

■Speed Dial

Home

QRG

Index

TOC press .

Continued 293

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

4. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then

press .

5. Using the button, follow the prompts to

complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For

example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

294

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To delete a voice tag

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

4. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag,

then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen.

■To delete a speed dial number 1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

4. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial,

then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 295

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported

phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

■Making a Call

1Making a Call

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by

voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

The maximum range between your phone and

vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of

the person you are calling through the audio

speakers.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

296

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To make a call using the imported phonebook

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically

imported to HFL.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then

3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.

Rotate to select the initial, then

4. Rotate to select a name, then press .

5. Rotate to select a number, then

uDialing starts automatically.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

Continued 297

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To make a call using a phone number

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .

3. Rotate to select a number, then

4. Rotate to select , then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

■To make a call using redial

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using redial

Press and hold the button to redial the last

number dialed in your phone’s history.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

298

Features

■To make a call using the call history

Call history is stored by All Calls, Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Call History, then

3. Rotate to select All Calls, Dialed Calls,

Received Calls, or Missed Calls, then

press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then

uDialing starts automatically.

■To make a call using a speed dial entry

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then

3. Rotate to select a number, then

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or

missed calls.

(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)

Some phones do not support All Calls.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the

list can be directly selected by pressing the

corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).

Select Select another speed dial to view another

paired phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call

from that list using the currently connected phone.

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by

voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

Continued 299

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

When there is an incoming call, an audible

notification sounds (if activated) and the

Incoming Call screen appears.

Press the button to answer the call.

Press the button to decline or end the call.

■Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting.

Press the button to put the current call on hold to

answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current

call.

Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer

it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the

current call.

HFL Mode

Caller Name

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

300

Features

The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call an automated

phone system.

1. To view the available options, press the

PHONE button.

2. Rotate to select the option, then

■Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

Dial Tones: Available on some phones.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC press .

301

Continued

Features

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using

your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an

incoming call.

(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call.

(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.

PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.

(Back) button:Press to cancel a command.

Interface dial: Rotate or move to select an item on the screen, then press .

■HFL Buttons

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell

phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing

procedures, and special feature capabilities:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-

528 -7876.

Voice control tips

•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere

with the microphone.

•Press and release the button when you want to

call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak

clearly and naturally after a beep.

•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,

the command may be misinterpreted.

•To change the volume level, use the audio system's

volume knob or the remote audio controls on the

steering wheel.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Models with navigation system

Talk

Button

Volume up Microphone

Hang-up Button

Pick-up Button

Volume down

Interface

Dial

PHONE

Button

(Back) Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

302

Features

The display shows call status and phone

information.

■HFL Status Display

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any

use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is

under license. Other trademarks and trade names are

those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio

system when it is playing. It will resume when the call

is ended.

Signal Strength

HFL Mode

Battery Level Status

Roam Status

Call Name

Bluetooth Indicator

Comes on when your

phone is connected to HFL.

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the display varies

between phone models.

You can change the system language to English,

French, or Spanish.

2Customized Features P. 90

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

303

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

HFL Menus

The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.

You can operate HFL by voice when on the PHONE screen. Below is the flow chart

showing available voice commands.

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle

is parked.

“Phone Setup”

Delete a previously paired phone.

Switch from a currently linked phone to

another paired phone.

Pair your phone to the system.

Disconnect your paired phone from the system.

Set a “fixed” or “random” pass-key code for

phone pairing.

“Connection”

“Add New Phone”

“Connect”

“Disconnect”

“Delete”

“Pass-Key”

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Select a number from Call History or

Phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

“Edit Speed Dial”

“Store Voice Tag”

“Delete Voice Tag”

“Store Speed Dial”

“Delete Speed Dial”

Create a PIN number for a paired phone.

Create a user name for a paired phone.

“Phone Name/PIN” “Phone Name”

“PIN”

“Clear Phone Information”

“Auto Answer”

“Auto Transfer” Turn the auto transfer on or off.

Turn the auto answer on or off.

Delete all paired phones, phonebook

entries, speed dials, and pass-keys.

Press the (Pick-Up) button to display the PHONE screen.

Press the (Talk) button each time you give a voice command.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

304

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Display a list of all 20 speed dial entries.

Send numbers or names during a call.

Mute your voice during a call.

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from

your phone to HFL.

“Dial”

“Dial Tones”

“Dial”

“Mute”

“Transfer”

The first four on the Cellular Phone screen.

“Speed dial entries”

“One”

“Two”

“Three”

“Four”

“Phonebook”

“Call History” Display the last 30 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls.

Display the paired phone’s previously imported phonebook

(or import a new one).

Press the (Pick-Up) button to display the Cellular Phone screen.

Press the (Talk) button each time you give a voice command.

“More Speed Dial”

Say a phone number to dial.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 305

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Yes. Press .

3. Put your cell phone in Discovery or

mode.

4. Select OK.

5. Select your phone in the list.

uSelect Phone Not Found? if your phone

is not found.

uRefer to your phone manual for

instructions on searching for a

Bluetoothr device.

6. Enter the 4-digit pairing code on your

phone when prompted to complete the

pairing process.

■Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to

HFL before you can make and receive hands-free

calls.

You can control the HFL system using voice

commands.

2HFL Menus P. 303

The maximum range between your phone and

vehicle is about 30 feet (10 meters).

Phone Pairing Tips

•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving.

•Your phone must be in discovery or search mode

when pairing the phone. Refer to your phone’s

manual.

•Up to six phones can be paired.

•Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is

paired to HFL.

•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found

by the system within three minutes, the system will

time out and returns to idle.

•The default pass-key “0000” is used until you

change the setting.

Pass-Key

You can change the pass-key setting.

2To change the Pass-key setting P. 307

You can delete the paired phone.

2To delete a paired phone P. 308

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

306

Features

■To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Connection, then press .

4. Rotate to select Add New Phone.

5. Select the location (1-6) for the phone to be

added.

6. Put your cell phone in Discovery or Search

mode.

7. Select OK.

uThe system begins to search for your

phone.

8. Select your phone in the list.

uSelect Phone Not Found? if your phone

is not found.

uRefer to your phone manual for

instructions on searching for a

Bluetoothr device.

9. Enter the 4-digit pairing code on your

phone when prompted to complete the

pairing process.

1To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to

the system)

If a prompt appears asking to connect to a phone,

select No and proceed with step 1.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

307

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■To change the Pass-key setting

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Connection, then press .

4. Rotate to select Pass-Key. Press .

5. Rotate to select an item. Press .

The following items are available:

•Random: Uses a randomly generated pass-key.

•Fixed: Create your own pass-key.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

308

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

6. If you select Fixed, move to select

DELETE to remove the current pass-key.

7. Enter a new pass-key. Move to

select

OK.

■To delete a paired phone

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select a Connection, then press .

4. Rotate to select Delete.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 309

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

5. Rotate to select a phone to delete.

uThe Bluetoothr icon indicates the

currently linked phone.

uItems to be deleted are indicated with a

trash icon.

6. Move to select OK.

7. Rotate to select Yes. Press to delete

the device(s).

■To change the currently paired phone

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Connection, then press .

4. Rotate to select Connect. Press .

5. Rotate to select a phone. Press .

uHFL disconnects the linked phone and

starts searching for another paired

phone. If no other paired phone is found,

HFL automatically links the previous

phone.

6. Press to select OK.

Trash icon

Bluetoothr icon

1To change the currently paired phone

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to

switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the

original phone is linked again.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

310

Features

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Phone Name/PIN, then press .

4. Rotate to select an item. Press .

The following items are available:

•Phone Name: Enter a name.

•PIN: Enter a 4-digit PIN. Re-enter to confirm. You can select DO NOT USE PIN to

remove a PIN number.

■To Create Phone Name/PIN

1To Create Phone Name/PIN

You can control the HFL system using voice

commands.

2HFL Menus P. 303

You can name up to six HFL users. Each can be PIN

protected, and have their own phonebook, speed

dial entries, and call history.

User name

PIN-protected speed dial

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

311

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically

transferred to HFL.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Auto Transfer, then press .

4. Rotate to select On, then press .

You can choose when the HFL system automatically answers incoming calls.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Auto Answer, then press .

4. Rotate to select a mode you want press .

■Automatic Transferring

■Automatic Answering

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

312

Features

All paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and pass-keys are erased.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Clear Phone Information, then press .

u If more than one phone is paired to the system, select the phone you want to

clear. The Bluetooth icon indicates the currently linked phone. Move to

select OK.

4. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

5. You will receive a notification message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,

then press .

6. You will receive a notification message on the screen. Rotate to finish.

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are

automatically imported to HFL.

■To Clear the System

■Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

Up to 10,000 numbers for 1,000 names can be

imported. Up to three icons are displayed for each

phonebook entry. If there are more than three

numbers for an entry, “…” is displayed.

This feature is not available on all phones.

Preference

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Car

Fax

Other

Voice

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 313

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

To store a speed dial number:

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then press .

4. Rotate to select Store Speed Dial, then press .

5. Rotate to select a location in the speed

dial list. Press .

6. Rotate to select a number entry

method. Press .

7. Follow the prompt to enter a voice tag.

The following options are available:

•Phonebook: Adds a number from the imported phonebook.

•Call History: Adds a number from the last 30 numbers.

•Dial: Enters a number manually.

■Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

You can control the HFL system using voice

commands.

2HFL Menus P. 303

Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored per user.

The first four entries are displayed on the Cellular

Phone screen.

You can select a No Entry field directly from the

Cellular Phone screen to store a speed dial number.

Speed dial

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

314

Features

■To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then press .

4. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag.

5. Rotate to select a speed dial entry.

6. Follow the prompt to enter a voice tag.

1To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number

Voice tags allow you to call speed dial entries from

any screen by saying “Dial by voice tag” and the

voice tag followed by “Dial”.

•Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

•Avoid using “Home” as a voice tag.

•It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name (e.g.,

“John Smith” instead of “John”).

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

315

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■To delete a voice tag

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then press .

4. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag. Press .

5. Rotate to select the number you want to delete the voice tag for. Move to

select OK.

■To delete a speed dial number

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Move to select PHONE SETUP.

3. Rotate to select Edit Speed Dial, then press .

4. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial. Press .

5. Rotate to select the entry you want to delete. Move to select OK.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

316

Features

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported

phonebook, call history, or speed dial entries.

■Making a Call

1Making a Call

You can control the HFL system using voice

commands.

2HFL Menus P. 303

When you say “Dial by number” or “Dial by

voice tag” on most screens, the following screen

appears:

Say the phone number or the voice tag (e.g.,

“John Smith”), followed by “Dial”.

2To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial

number P. 314

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.

When there are more than two paired phones in the

vehicle, a first paired phone the system finds will be

automatically linked.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 317

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To make a call using the imported phonebook

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically

imported to HFL.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .

3. Rotate to select a name. Press .

uMove or to select alphabetical

tabs to display the entries in the group.

4. Rotate to select a number. Press to

begin dialing.

■To make a call using a phone number

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .

3. Enter a phone number.

4. Move to select DIAL to begin dialing.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

You must first import a phonebook before using it to

make calls.

2Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook

and Call History P. 312

1To make a call using a phone number

A command that consists of several words can be

spoken together. For example, say

“123-456-

7890” at once.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

318

Features

■To make a call using the call history

Call history is stored by All, Dial, Receive, and Missed.

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Call History, then press .

3. Rotate to select a call. Press to begin

dialing.

uMove or to select All, Dial,

Receive, Missed to view the call history

by category.

■To make a call using a speed dial entry

1. Press the PHONE button or the button.

2. Rotate to select one of the four speed dial numbers. Press to begin dialing.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history only shows the last 30 calls from your

phone.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

Select More Speed Dial to view another paired

phone’s speed dial list.

To make a call using speed dial, you need to create

speed dial entries.

2Speed Dial P. 313

If the other phone is PIN-protected, enter the PIN

when prompted. Select OK. PINs are optional.

2To Create Phone Name/PIN P. 310

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

319

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

1. Press the (Pick-up) button to answer a

call and display the Calling screen.

uHANDSFREELINK is also displayed on

the display.

2. Press the (Hang-up) button to

terminate the call.

The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL.

Dial Tones: Send numbers or names during a call. This is useful when you call an

automated phone system.

1. To view the available options, press the

PHONE button.

2. Rotate to select the option, then

■Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

An incoming call notification appears on the screen,

and you hear an audible ring tone.

If your phone has Call Waiting, press the button

to put the original call on hold and answer the

incoming call. To return to the original call, press the

button again. If you want to hang up the original

call and answer the new call, press the button.

To change the volume level of HFL, use the audio

system volume knob or the steering wheel volume

controls.

Some phones may send battery, signal strength, and

roaming status information to the screen.

Phonebook

Displays the imported phonebook.

2To make a call using the imported

phonebook P. 317

■Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

Dial Tones: Available on some phones.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

320

Features

Compass*

When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the compass self-calibrates, and the

compass display appears.

Compass Calibration

If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the compass display blinks, you

need to manually calibrate the system.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

2. Press and hold the SETUP button until

the display shows the compass setting

menu list.

3. Rotate to select Calibration, then

4. When the display changes to Start

Calibration, press .

5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.

uThe compass starts to show a direction

after the calibration. The CAL indicator

goes off.

1Compass*

Compass calibration can be affected under the

following conditions:

•Driving near power lines or stations

•Crossing a bridge

•Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large

object that can cause a magnetic disturbance

•When accessories such as antennas and roof racks

are mounted by magnets

On some models, the Compass Calibration screen is

displayed but Calibration and Zone Adjust will not

respond if selected.

1Compass Calibration

Calibrate the compass in an open area.

While setting the compass:

•The RETURN button returns to the previous screen.

•The SETUP button cancels the setting mode.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

press .

321

uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection

Features

Compass Zone Selection

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

2. Press and hold the SETUP button until

the display shows the compass setting

menu list.

3. Rotate to select Zone Adjust, then

press . The display shows the current

zone number.

4. Rotate to select the zone number of

your area (See Zone Map), then press .

1Compass Zone Selection

The zone selection is done to compensate the variation

between magnetic north and true north.

If the calibration starts while the audio system is in

use, the display returns to normal after the calibration

is completed.

Zone Number

Zone Map

Guam Island: Zone 8

Puerto Rico: Zone11

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

322

Home

QRG

Index

323

Driving

This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving

Driving Preparation .......................... 324

Maximum Load Limit........................ 327

Towing a Trailer

Towing Preparation.......................... 329

Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 338

Towing Your Vehicle........................ 339

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

General Information......................... 340

Important Safety Precautions............ 340

Avoiding Trouble ............................. 341

When Driving

Starting the Engine .......................... 342

Precautions While Driving................. 344

Automatic Transmission................... 345

Shifting............................................ 346

Cruise Control ................................. 348

VSA

(Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC

(Electronic Stability Control), System ...... 352

VTM (Variable Torque Management)-4r

System*............................................. 354

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 355

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -

Required Federal Explanation ......... 357

Braking

Brake System ................................... 360

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 362

Brake Assist System ......................... 363

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped ................................ 364

Parking Sensor System*................... 365

Rearview Camera*............................ 369

Multi-View Rear Camera*................ 370

Refueling

Fuel Information .............................. 371

How to Refuel ................................. 372

Fuel Economy.................................... 374

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories ...................................... 375

Modifications................................... 375

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

324

Driving

Before Driving

Driving Preparation

Check the following items before you start driving.

•Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior

lights, or other parts of the vehicle.

uRemove any frost, snow, or ice.

uRemove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of

vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.

uWhen removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel

or wheel components.

•Make sure the hood is securely closed.

uIf the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

•Make sure the tires are in good condition.

uCheck air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.

2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 414

•Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.

uThere are blind spots from the inside.

■Exterior Checks

1Exterior Checks

NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around

the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force

them open, as this can damage the rubber trim

around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid

further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.

You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in

the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite

flammable materials left under the hood, causing a

fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended

period, inspect and remove any debris that may have

collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have

fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a

small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover

flammable materials after you or someone else has

performed maintenance on your vehicle.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 325

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

Driving

•Store or secure all items on board properly.

uCarrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's

handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

2Maximum Load Limit P. 327

•Do not pile items higher than the seat height.

uThey can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden

braking.

•Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor

mat.

uAn object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator

pedal operation while driving.

•If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.

uThey may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.

•Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.

2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 103

•Adjust your seating position properly.

uAdjust the head restraint, too.

2Adjusting the Seats P. 137

2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 141

•Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.

uAdjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

2Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 134

2Adjusting the Mirrors P. 135

■Interior Checks

1Interior Checks

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not

need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry

heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have

the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified

technician.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

326

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

Driving

•Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the

seats.

uThey can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation

of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.

•Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.

2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 32

•Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the

vehicle, and go off soon after.

uAlways have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2Indicators P. 68

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

327

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Continued

Driving

Maximum Load Limit

The maximum load for your vehicle is 1,340 lbs (608 kg).

See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and

the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg

or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1, 400 lbs. and there

will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

1Maximum Load Limit

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue

load.

2Specifications P. 464

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

2Specifications P. 464

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading

can affect handling and stability

and cause a crash in which you

can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other

loading guidelines in this manual.

Label Example

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

328

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Driving

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo,

and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVW R) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the

driver’s doorjamb.

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load

1,340 lbs

(608 kg)

Passenger Weight

150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs

(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight

1,040 lbs

(472 kg)

Example2

Max Load

1,340 lbs

(608 kg)

Passenger Weight

150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs

(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight

590 lbs

(268 kg)

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

329

Continued

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Towing Preparation

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper

equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.

■Total trailer weight

Do not exceed the maximum allowable

weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in

or on it shown in the table.

Towing loads in excess of this can seriously

affect vehicle handling and performance and

can damage the engine and drivetrain.

Each weight limit is calculated based on the following conditions:

•Occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back

•Each occupant weights 150 lbs (68 kg)

•Each occupant has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area

Any additional weight, cargo or accessories reduce the maximum trailer weight and

maximum tongue load.

■Towing Load Limits

1Towing Load Limits

Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.

If a public scale is not available, add the estimated

weight of your cargo load to the weight of your

trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then

measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or

tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo

distribution.

Refer to the trailer owner's manual for additional

information.

Break-in Period

Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600

miles (1,000 km).

Never exceed the gross weight ratings.

Gross weight information

2Vehicle Specifications P. 464

WARNING

Exceeding any load limit or improperly

loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a

crash in which you can be seriously hurt or

killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and

trailer carefully before starting to drive.

Total Load

Number of

occupants 4WD models 2WD models with

ATF cooler

2WD models

without ATF cooler

24,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) 2,000 lbs (905 kg)

34,300 lbs (1,950 kg) 3,300 lbs (1,497 kg)

Towing not

recommended

44,100 lbs (1,860 kg) 3,100 lbs (1,406 kg)

54,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 3,000 lbs (1,361 kg)

63,800 lbs (1,724 kg) 2,800 lbs (1,270 kg)

72,000 lbs (905 kg) 2,000 lbs (905 kg)

8Towing not

recommended

Towing not

recommended

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

330

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

Driving

■Tongue load

The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded

trailer on the hitch should be approximately:

Boat trailers: 5 - 10% of the total trailer

weight

Other trailers: 8 - 15% of total trailer weight

Tongue Load

Number of

occupants 4WD models 2WD models with

ATF cooler

2WD models

without ATF cooler

2450 lbs (204 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)

3400 lbs (181 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)

Towing not

recommended

4330 lbs (150 kg) 230 lbs (104 kg)

5270 lbs (122 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)

6190 lbs (86 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

7100 lbs (45 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)

8Towing not

recommended

Towing not

recommended

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

331

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

Continued

Driving

■To estimate the tongue load

Excessive tongue load reduces front tire traction and steering control. Too little

tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.

You can estimate the tongue load by measuring the trailer hitch height from the

ground in the following steps:

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.

2. Measure the distance between the ground and the bottom of the trailer hitch.

3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to the hitch.

4. Measure the distance between the ground and the bottom of the trailer

hitch again.

5. Subtract the second measurement from the first measurement, then refer to the

following table.

If the difference becomes more than indicated in the table, distribute the load or

remove cargo as needed.

If the difference is 4WD models 2WD models

5/8” 150 lbs (68 kg)

1 1/4” 250 lbs (114 kg)

1 3/4” 350 lbs (159 kg)

2 1/4” 450 lbs (205 kg) -

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

332

Driving

■How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale

Check each weight in the order indicated as shown.

Refer to the table on the right for each weight’s limit except for the tongue load.

2Tongue load P. 330

•If you cannot weigh the rear axle, subtract 1 from 2.

•The maximum gross combined weight (4) decreases by 2% for every 1,000 feet

(305 meters) of elevation.

•To calculate the tongue load, subtract 5 from 6.

•Refer to the trailer owner's manual for additional information.

1How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale

Fully load the vehicle and trailer. An attendant who

watches the scale is needed as all occupants should

stay in the vehicle.

*: LX models

If a public scale is not available, add the estimated

weight of your cargo load to the weight of your

trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then

measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or

tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo

distribution.

Weight limit for 2WD models 4WD models

Front gross axle 2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)

Gross vehicle 5,952 lbs

(2,700 kg)

6,096 lbs

(2,765 kg)

Rear gross axle 3,196 lbs

(1,450 kg)

3,362 lbs

(1,525 kg)

3,252 lbs

(1,475 kg)*

Gross combined 8,466 lbs

(3,840kg)

9,579 lbs

(4,345kg)

1. Front gross axle weight.

2. Gross vehicle weight.

4. Gross combined weight.

3. Rear gross axle weight.

5. Hitched trailer weight.

6. Unhitched trailer weight.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 333

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

Driving

Your vehicle has a class 3 trailer hitch as standard equipment.

The jumper harness and trailer brake fuse are stored in the glove box.

2Trailer brakes P. 334

2Trailer light P. 335

Turn the knob one-quarter left to open the

cover.

uThe 7-Pin trailer connector and trailer

hitch are located.

■Towing Equipment and Accessories

1Towing Equipment and Accessories

Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and

maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/

territory, and local regulations.

Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other

items are recommended or required for your towing

situation.

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type

and brand. If a connector is required, it should only

be installed by a qualified technician.

Trailer packages and products:

•Ball mount, hitch plug, hitch pin etc.

•Wiring harness kit

•Trailer hitch kit (jumper harness included)

2Trailer brakes P. 334

•Automatic transmission cooler kit

2Automatic transmission cooler P. 337

Are available at a dealer.

2WD models

Knob

7-Pin Trailer

Connector

Trailer Hitch

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

334

Driving

■Trailer brakes

Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more:

There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are

common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not

attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower

braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.

The 4-pin gray connector installed in your vehicle has all of the circuits required to

install most electric trailer brake controllers.

Have a qualified mechanic install your trailer

brake controller following the trailer brake

controller manufacturer’s instructions. Failure

to properly install the trailer brake controller

may increase the distance it takes for you to

stop your vehicle when towing a trailer.

The trailer jumper harness is used to install the

controller for the electric trailer brakes.

Insert the trailer brake fuse into the engine

compartment sub fuse box.

2Engine Compartment Sub Fuse Box P. 455

1Trailer brakes

The 4-pin gray connector is located under the

instrument panel near the top of the parking brake

pedal.

Electric Brake

(Brown/White)

Ground (Black)

Brake (20A)

(Purple)

Stop (Sky Blue)

Trailer brake controller

connector’s terminals:

Electric Brake

(Brown/White)

Ground

(Black)

Brake (20A)

(Blue)

Brake Lights

(Sky Blue)

Touring models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 335

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

Driving

■Trailer light

Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and

local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the

requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

We recommend that you have a dealer install a Honda wiring harness and converter.

They are designed for your vehicle.

1Trailer light

The trailer lighting connector is located behind the

left side panel in the cargo area.

Even if you are planning to use the non-Honda trailer

lighting harness and converter, ask a dealer for the

correct connector and pins.

Left Turn Signal and

Brake Lights (Red)

Back-up Lights (Yellow)

Electric Brake

(Brown/White)

Right Turn Signal and

Brake Lights (White)

Ground (Black)

Taillights (Green)

+B Charge (Blue)

Pins’ wiring color codes and their purposes:

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

336

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

Driving

The 7-pin trailer connector is needed for your trailer lights.

When inserting the connector to the socket, check if the connector and the socket

are free of dirt, moisture, or other foreign material.

■Hitches

Read the trailer manufacturer's instructions, and select the appropriate draw bar for

the height of the trailer you will be towing.

■Weight distribution hitches

A weight distributing hitch is not recommended for use with your vehicle.

An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch may reduce handling, stability, and

braking performance.

Touring models

Pins’ wiring color codes and

their purposes: 1. Pull the socket lid to open.

3. Hook the lid

retaining tab onto

the socket retaining

tab.

2. Insert the 7-pin trailer

connector into the socket.

Socket

Back Light

(Yellow)

Left Turn/

Stop (Red)

Electric Brake

(Brown/White)

Right Turn/

Stop (White)

Ground (Black)

Small Light

(Green)

+B Charge

(Blue)

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

337

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

Driving

■Safety chains

Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the

trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

■Sway control

Recommended to use if your trailer tends to sway. Consult the trailer maker for

what kind of sway control you need and how to install it.

■Automatic transmission cooler

Install an additional ATF (automatic transmission fluid) cooler to help prevent the

transmission from overheating, and damaging. You can get the additional ATF

cooler at a dealer.

■Trailer mirrors

Many states, provinces and territories require special exterior mirrors when towing a

trailer. Install special mirrors whenever you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the

trailer creates a blind spot.

2WD models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

338

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

Driving

Driving Safely with a Trailer

•Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.

•Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.

2Towing Load Limits P. 329

•When towing more than 3,500lbs (1,590 kg), use of gasoline with a pump octane

number of 91 or higher is recommended.

uTowing performance can be affected by high altitude, high temperature, or

steep uphill.

•Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.

•Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while

driving.

•Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.

•Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.

•Drive slower than normal.

•Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.

•Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

•Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.

•Allow more time and distance for braking.

•Do not brake or turn suddenly.

■Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer

■Towing Speeds and Gears

■Turning and Braking

1Driving Safely with a Trailer

Parking

In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel

chocks at each of the trailer's tires.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

339

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

Driving

•Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the

climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool

down the engine if necessary.

•Shift to the (d position if the transmission shifts frequently.

If the tires slip when retrieving a boat from the water, shift to (1, and turn on VTM-

4r lock. Disengage VTM-4r lock as soon as the boat is out of the water to prevent

damage to the VTM-4r system.

Towing Your Vehicle

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs

to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

2Emergency Towing P. 459

■Driving in Hilly Terrain

■Retrieving a Boat

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

340

Driving

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

General Information

Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher

ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not

designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat

different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it

does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get

acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.

Important Safety Precautions

To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and

recommendations:

•Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.

2Maximum Load Limit P. 327

•Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.

•Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.

•It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.

1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result

in a crash or a rollover.

2Important Handling Information P. 26

2Precautions While Driving P. 344

WARNING

Improperly operating this vehicle on or off

pavement can cause a crash or rollover in

which you and your passengers can be

seriously injured or killed.

•Follow all instructions and guidelines in

this owner’s manual.

•Keep your speed low, and don’t drive

faster than conditions permit.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

341

uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble

Driving

Avoiding Trouble

•Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all

scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the

condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.

•Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have

limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and

power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in

a hazardous situation.

•Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start

or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.

•Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover

or damage to your suspension or other components.

•Driving on Slopes increasing your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to

drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight or down a slope is usually the

safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before

you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it. Find

another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back

down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.

•Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water

in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully

before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground

underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find

another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The

water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and

causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.

•If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you

unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could

damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need

to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose. Home

QRG

Index

TOC

342

Driving

When Driving

Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P, then

depress the brake pedal.

uAlthough it is possible to start the vehicle

in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e

without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1Starting the Engine

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when

starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in

thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400

meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all

electrical accessories such as the lights, climate

control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce

battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,

an engine block heater will improve starting and

warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently

below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant

mixture should be changed to a higher concentration

to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can

smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with

the engine or exhaust system.

Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15

seconds.

•If the engine does not start right away, wait for at

least 10 seconds before trying again.

•If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,

wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3

while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.

Release the accelerator pedal once the engine

starts.

Brake Pedal

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

343

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Driving

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that

the parking brake indicator has gone off.

2Parking Brake P. 360

2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.

3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to

pull away.

■Hill start assist system

Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from

rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Move the shift lever to (D or (d when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,

then release the brake pedal.

■Starting to Drive

1Starting the Engine

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from

theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is

used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.

2Immobilizer System P. 118

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from

rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and

does not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking

brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is

switched off.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

344

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Driving

Precautions While Driving

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss of control:

•Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.

•Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.

•Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.

•Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.

Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine,

driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.

Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

■Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

■In Rain

■Other Precautions

1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result

in a crash or a rollover.

2Important Handling Information P. 26

2Precautions While Driving P. 344

1Precautions While Driving

NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the

accelerator pedal. You could damage the

transmission.

If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or

LOCK (0 while driving, the engine will shut down

and all steering and brake power assist functions will

stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose

engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,

avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so

as not to damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).

You should also follow this when the brake pads are

replaced.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

345

uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission

Driving

Automatic Transmission

The following conditions cause the engine to run at high revolutions, and

increase creeping:

•Immediately after the engine starts.

•When the climate control system is in use.

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the

transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress

the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

■Creeping

■Kickdown

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

346

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

■Shift lever positions

1Shifting

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and

remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in

(N while the engine is cold.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,

apply the parking brake.

Park

Used when parking or starting the

engine

Reverse

Used when reversing

Neutral

Used when idling

Drive

Used for normal driving (gears change

between 1st and 5th automatically)

Drive (D3)

Press the (d button while the shift lever

is in (D.

Used when:

●Going up or down hills

●Towing a trailer in hilly terrain

Second

Used to increase engine braking

(the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)

First

Used to further increase engine braking

(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)

Release Button

(d Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

347

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

■Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and

vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the

brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come

to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the

lever position before pulling away.

Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,

a blinking D indicator indicates a transmission

problem.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission

checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine

speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine

speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a

slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

Tachometer's red zone

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Depress the brake pedal and press

the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever

release button.

Press the shift lever release button

and shift.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

348

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Driving

Cruise Control

Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the

accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a

constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.

1Cruise Control

It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed

when driving uphill or downhill.

When not using cruise control:

Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE

button.

WARNING

Improper use of the cruise control can lead

to a crash.

Use the cruise control only when traveling

on open highways in good weather.

■Shift positions for cruise control:

In (D or (d

Always keep sufficient distance

between you and the vehicle in

front of you.

■Vehicle speed for cruise control:

Desired speed in a range above

roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~

CRUISE MAIN is on in the

instrument panel.

Cruise control is ready to use.

■Press the CRUISE button

on the steering wheel.

When to use

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

349

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Continued

Driving

Take your foot off the pedal and press the DECEL/SET button when you reach the

desired speed.

The moment you release the DECEL/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise

control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

■To Set the Vehicle Speed

DECEL/SET Button

On when cruise control begins

Press and release

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

350

Driving

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/ACCEL or DECEL/SET buttons

on the steering wheel.

•Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by

about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

•If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you

release it. This speed is then set.

■To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

You can set the vehicle speed using the DECEL/SET

button on the steering wheel when adjusting the

speed with the accelerator and brake pedals.

To decrease speed

To increase speed

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

351

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Driving

To cancel cruise control, do any of

the following:

•Press the CANCEL button.

•Press the CRUISE button.

•Depress the brake pedal.

The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

■To Cancel

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed:

After cruise control has been canceled, you can still

resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/

ACCEL button while driving at a speed of at least 25

mph (40 km/h) or more.

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

•When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)

•When the CRUISE button is turned off

At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise

control is canceled automatically.

CRUISE

Button CANCEL

Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

352

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

Driving

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic

Stability Control), System

VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less

than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.

It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the

engine does not respond to the accelerator.

You may also notice some noise from the

hydraulic system. You will also see the

indicator blink.

■VSA® Operation

1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), System

The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and

size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and

type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on

while driving, there may be a problem with the

system. While this may not interfere with normal

driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer

immediately.

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations

and does not control the entire braking system. You

still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate

for the conditions and always leave a sufficient

margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA® system is generally

known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The

system also includes a traction control function.

VSA® System

Indicator

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

353

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

Driving

This button is on the driver side control panel.

To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and

hold it until you hear a beep.

VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.

To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)

button until you hear a beep.

VSA® is turned on every time you start the

engine, even if you turned it off the last time

you drove the vehicle.

■VSA® On and Off

1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), System

Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking

and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®

traction and stability enhancement.

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets

stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier

to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

When the VSA® system is off, the traction control

system is also off. You should only attempt to free

your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to

free it when the VSA® is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to

switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving

your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control

systems switched off.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS, low tire pressure, or

TPMS indicator comes on or blinks, the VSA® system

comes on automatically. In this case, you cannot turn

the system off by pressing the button.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being

performed immediately after starting the engine or

while driving. This is normal.

VSA® OFF Indicator

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

354

uuWhen DrivinguVTM (Variable Torque Management)-4r System*

Driving

VTM (Variable Torque Management)-4r System*

Senses a traction loss caused by a road condition change, and automatically

transfers some power to the rear wheels.

Use the VTM-4r LOCK to increase more torque to the rear wheels.

1. Stop your vehicle with the engine running.

2. Move the shift lever to (1, (2, or (R.

3. Press the VTM-4r LOCK button.

uThe indicator in the button comes on.

Any of the following disengages the VTM-4r LOCK:

•Pressing the VTM-4r LOCK button again.

•Moving the shift lever to (D or (d.

•Turning the ignition switch to the LOCK (0 position.

■To Engage the VTM-4r LOCK

■To Disengage the VTM-4r LOCK

1VTM (Variable Torque Management)-4r System*

NOTICE

Do not continuously spin the front tires of your

vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can

cause transmission or rear differential damage.

1To Engage the VTM-4r LOCK

Do not use the VTM-4r LOCK button on dry, paved

roads. Driving on dry, paved roads with VTM-4r

LOCK on may damage the rear differential when

making a turn. Strange noise and vibration can also

result.

The VTM-4r LOCK can be used to help free your

vehicle from being stuck in mud, sand, or gravel.

When the lock is engaged, apply light pressure to the

accelerator pedal.

When more torque is applied, the rear tires are not

likely to spin. This is normal.

If you are not able to free the vehicle, stop and

reverse direction.

As soon as this feature is no longer needed,

disengage the VTM-4r LOCK.

1To Disengage the VTM-4r LOCK

The VTM-4r LOCK temporarily disengages when the

vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The

indicator in the button remains on.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

355

uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Continued

Driving

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Monitors the tire pressure while you are

driving. If your vehicle's tire pressure becomes

significantly low, the low tire pressure

indicator comes on.

Monitors the tire pressure while you are

driving. If your vehicle's tire pressure becomes

significantly low, the low tire pressure/TPMS

indicator comes on and a message appears on

the multi-information display.

1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and

altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can

trigger the low tire pressure indicator to come on.

2If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes

On P. 452

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:

•Warm weather can become under-inflated in

colder weather.

•Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer

weather.

The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a

result of over inflation.

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and

altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can

trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come

on.

2If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Comes On or Blinks P. 453

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:

•Warm weather can become under-inflated in

colder weather.

•Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer

weather.

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come

on as a result of over inflation.

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

356

Driving

If your vehicle's tire pressure becomes significantly low, the specific tire indicator

comes on.

To select the tire pressure monitor, turn the

ignition switch to ON

, and press the /

(information) button until you see the tire

pressure screen.

The pressure for each tire is displayed in PSI

(U.S.) or kPa (Canada).

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE is displayed when a

tire has significantly low pressure. The specific

tire is displayed on the screen.

■Tire Pressure Monitor

1Tire Pressure Monitor

The pressure displayed on the multi-information

display can be slightly different from the actual

pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a

significant difference between the two values, or if

the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the message

on the multi-information display do not go off after

you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure,

have the system checked by a dealer.

CHECK TPMS SYSTEM may appear if you drive with

the compact spare tire, or there is a problem with the

TPMS.

Models with multi-information display

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

357

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Continued

Driving

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -

Required Federal Explanation

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when

cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle

manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped

with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or more tires is

significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell tale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can

lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

358

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Driving

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction

indicator is provided by a separate telltale, which displays the symbol

“TPMS” when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may

not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including

the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or

more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly.

Models with information display

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

359

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Driving

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction

indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure

telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash

for approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-

ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle

that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Models with multi-information display

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

360

Driving

Braking

Brake System

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.

To apply:

Depress the parking brake pedal down with

your foot.

To release:

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Pull the release handle fully.

■Parking Brake

1Parking Brake

NOTICE

Release the parking brake fully before driving. The

rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive

with the parking brake applied.

If you start driving without fully releasing the parking

brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and RELEASE

PARKING BRAKE appears on the multi-information

display*.

Always apply the parking brake when parking.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

361

uuBrakinguBrake System

Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist

helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases

the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency

situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when

braking very hard.

2Brake Assist System P. 363

2ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 362

■Foot Brake

1Foot Brake

Check the brakes after driving through deep water,

or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If

necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the

pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when

applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be

replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a

long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake

effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your

foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a

lower gear.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause

them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad

life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

362

uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Driving

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by

pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also

balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always

keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as

“stomp and steer.”

■ABS operation

The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the

pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very

hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately

if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

■ABS

1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use an

incorrect tire type and size.

When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,

there may be a problem with the system.

While normal braking is not affected, there is a

possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes

to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control

during hard braking.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more

stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:

•When driving on rough road surfaces, including

when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or

snow.

•When tire chains are installed.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being

performed immediately after starting the engine or

while driving. This is normal.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

363

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Driving

Brake Assist System

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress

the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■Brake assist system operation

Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise

may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

364

Driving

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped

1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with the shift lever in (D.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P.

4. Turn off the engine.

Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

1Parking Your Vehicle

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,

such as dry grass, oil, or timber.

Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

1When Stopped

NOTICE

The following can damage the transmission:

•Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals

simultaneously.

•Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by

depressing the accelerator pedal.

•Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle

stops completely.

Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

365

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

Continued

Driving

Parking Sensor System*

The corner and rear center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the

beeper and display let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and

the obstacle.

■The sensor location and range

1Parking Sensor System*

Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is

no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.

The system may not work properly when:

•The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or

dirt.

•The vehicle is on an uneven surface, such as grass,

bumps, or a hill.

•The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.

•The system is affected by some electric devices that

generate ultrasonic waves.

•Driving in bad weather.

The system may not sense:

•Thin or low objects.

•Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,

or sponge.

•Objects directly under the bumper.

Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.

Within about 60 cm (24 in) or less Within about 110 cm (43 in) or less

Front Corner Sensors Rear Center Sensors

Rear Corner Sensors

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

366

Driving

■When you activate the system

The indicator in the button comes on and the beeper sounds when the system is on.

The corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in any position

other than (P, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The rear center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in (R, and

the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

1Parking Sensor System*

When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the

system will be in the previously selected condition.

Parking Sensor System

Button:

Press to activate the

system with the ignition

switch in ON (w.

Beep

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

367

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

Continued

Driving

■When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes shorter

Length of the

intermittent

beep

Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle

Appropriate Indicator

Navigation

screen indicator

color

Corner Sensors Center Sensors

Long —About 43-24 in (110-60 cm) Yellow

Short About 24-18 in (60-45 cm) About 24-18 in (60-45 cm) Amber

Very short About 18-14 in (45-35 cm) About 18-14 in (45-35 cm) Amber

Continuous About 14 in (35 cm) or less About 14 in (35 cm) or less Red

Multi-

information

display

Stays on

Navigation

screen

Blinks

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

368

Driving

■The parking sensor system on navigation screen

•An appropriate indicator blinks when there

are any obstacles around the parking

sensors. The color of the indicator changes

in accordance with the distance between

your vehicle and obstacles.

•An appropriate indicator stays on in red

when there is a problem with the

corresponding parking sensor.

2Multi-Information Display Warning

and Information Messages* P. 78

1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Turn the ignition

switch to LOCK (0.

2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and turn the ignition switch to

ON (w.

3. Keep pressing the button for ten seconds. Release the button when the indicator

in the button flashes.

4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.

uThe beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.

To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds

three times when the rear sensors come back on.

■Turning off All Rear Sensors

1Turning off All Rear Sensors

When you shift to (R, the indicator in the parking

sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the

rear sensors have been turned off.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

369

Driving

Rearview Camera*

About Your Rearview Camera

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.

The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is

moved to (R.

■Rearview Camera Display Area

1About Your Rearview Camera

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see

the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath

the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects

appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing

up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and

high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do

not rely on the rearview display which does not give

you all information about conditions at the back of

your vehicle.

To turn the guide lines on or off, press and hold the

RETURN button for about three seconds.

If you turn the guide lines off, they remain off until

you turn them back on.

Rotate to adjust the brightness of the rearview

camera.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,

use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free

of debris.

Models without navigation system

Screen display

Bumper

Guidelines Approx. 118 in (3 m)

Approx. 79 in (2 m)

Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Approx. 20 in (0.5 m)

Tailgate Open Range

Approx. 118 in (3 m)

Approx. 79 in (2 m)

Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Camera

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

370

Driving

Multi-View Rear Camera*

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

For models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual.

Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

371

Continued

Driving

Refueling

Fuel Information

■Fuel recommendation

Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise

that can lead to engine damage.

■Top tier detergent gasoline

Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda

endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help

maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive

manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met

“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is

guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic

additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic

additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission

control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on

gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit

www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top

tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

1Fuel Information

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing

detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and

engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain

good performance, fuel economy, and emissions

control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline

that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based

fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is

available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely

affect performance, and cause the malfunction

indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.

If this happens, contact a dealer for service.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

372

Driving

■Gasoline containing ethanol

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is

designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by

volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable

operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of

gasoline.

■Fuel tank capacity: 21.0 US gal (79.5 liters)

How to Refuel

1. Stop your vehicle with the service

station pump on the left side of the

vehicle in the rear.

2. Turn off the engine.

3. Pull on the fuel fill door release

handle under the lower left corner of

the dashboard.

uThe fuel fill door opens.

1How to Refuel

WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.

You can be burned or seriously injured

when handling fuel.

•Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,

and flame away.

•Handle fuel only outdoors.

•Wipe up spills immediately.

Pull

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

373

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

Driving

4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a

release of air, wait until this stops, then turn

the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.

5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.

6. Insert the fuel filler nozzle fully.

uWhen the tank is full, the filler nozzle will

click off automatically. This leaves space

in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands

with a change in the temperature.

7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,

tightening it until you hear it click at least

once.

uShut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in

the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result

of changes in air temperature.

If the fuel filler nozzle keeps turning off when the

tank is not full, there may be a problem with the

pump's fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at

another pump. If this does not fix the problem,

consult a dealer.

Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has

automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed

the full tank capacity.

Cap

Holder

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

374

Driving

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your

driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and

other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.

Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the

information display*/multi-information display*.

•Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.

•Maintain the specified tire pressure.

•Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.

•Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside

adds weight and increases wind resistance.

■Maintenance and Fuel Economy

1Improving Fuel Economy

Direct calculation is the recommended method to

determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are

established following a simulated test. For more

information on how this test is performed, please visit

http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

Miles driven Gallons of

fuel

Miles per

Gallon

100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

375

Driving

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

When installing accessories, check the following:

•Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and

delay your reaction to driving conditions.

•Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows.

Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the

side curtain airbags.

•Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with

proper operation of your vehicle.

2Fuses P. 454

•Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for

assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

Modifications

Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its

handling, stability, and reliability.

Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is

properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,

territory, and local regulations.

1Accessories and Modifications

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to

ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

WARNING

Improper accessories or modifications can

affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and

performance, and cause a crash in which

you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner's

manual regarding accessories and

modifications.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

376

Home

QRG

Index

377

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance ............ 378

Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 379

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance

Service ........................................... 380

Maintenance Minder™ .................... 381

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 389

Opening the Hood ........................... 390

Recommended Engine Oil ................ 392

Oil Check......................................... 393

Adding Engine Oil............................ 394

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 395

Engine Coolant................................ 397

Transmission Fluid............................ 399

Brake Fluid....................................... 400

Power Steering Fluid ........................ 400

Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 401

Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 402

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

....410

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires ................................. 414

Tire and Loading Information Label...... 415

Tire Labeling .................................... 415

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......417

Wear Indicators................................ 419

Tire Service Life................................ 419

Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 420

Tire Rotation.................................... 421

Winter Tires ..................................... 422

Battery............................................... 423

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Button Battery ........... 424

Remote Control and Wireless

Headphone Care*........................... 425

Climate Control System Maintenance

.....427

Cleaning

Interior Care .................................... 428

Exterior Care.................................... 430

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

378

Maintenance

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle

in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient

brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in

effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and

inspection information.

■Daily inspections

Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when

refueling.

■Periodic inspections

•Check the automatic transmission fluid level monthly.

2Automatic Transmission Fluid P. 399

•Check the brake fluid level monthly.

2Checking the Brake Fluid P. 400

•Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.

2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 414

•Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.

2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 402

•Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.

2Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 410

■Types of Inspection and Maintenance

1Inspection and Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of

emissions control devices and systems may be

done by any automotive repair establishment or

individuals using parts that are “certified” to

EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to

perform maintenance on the maintenance main

items marked with # will not void your emissions

warranties. However, all maintenance services should

be performed in accordance with the intervals

indicated by the information display*/multi-

information display*.

2Maintenance Service Items P. 383

If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks

that require more skills and tools, purchase the

service manual.

2Authorized Manuals P. 474

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make

sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.

After performing maintenance, update the records in

the separate maintenance booklet.

U.S. models

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

379

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.

However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in

performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform

a given task.

•To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames

away from the battery and all fuel related parts.

•Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.

uHeat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.

•To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not

gasoline.

•Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or

compressed air.

•Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.

uOnly operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

•The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.

uMake sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and

the engine is off.

•Be aware that hot parts can burn you.

uMake sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before

touching vehicle parts.

•Be aware that moving parts can injure you.

uDo not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away

from moving parts.

■Maintenance Safety

■Vehicle Safety

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

WARNING

Improperly maintaining this vehicle or

failing to correct a problem before driving

can cause a crash in which you can be

seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and

maintenance recommendations according

to the schedules in this owner's manual.

WARNING

Failure to properly follow maintenance

instructions and precautions can cause you

to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and

precautions in this owner's manual.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

380

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Maintenance

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the

same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

381

Continued

Maintenance

Maintenance Minder™

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages

appear on the information display or the multi-information display every time you

* *

turn the ignition switch to ON (w. The messages notify you when to change

the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated

maintenance services.

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

2. Press the (Select/Reset) knob repeatedly

until the engine oil life appears on the

information display.

The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays

on in the instrument panel after the engine oil

life becomes 0%. Have the indicated

maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

■Displaying the Engine Oil Life

Models with information display

1Displaying the Engine Oil Life

Based on the engine operating conditions, the

remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed

as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil

Life (%)

Calculated Engine Oil

Life (%)

100 100 to 91

90 90 to 81

80 80 to 71

70 70 to 61

60 60 to 51

50 50 to 41

40 40 to 31

30 30 to 21

20 20 to 16

15 15 to 11

10 10 to 6

55 to 1

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

382

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance

To switch the display, press the (Select/Reset) knob.

■Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display

Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder Indicator

The engine oil life indicator starts

to appear along with other due

soon maintenance item codes

when the remaining oil life

becomes 15 percent.

The engine oil is approaching the

end of its service life.

Starts to come on when the

remaining engine oil life becomes

15 percent.

It goes off when the display is

switched.

The SERVICE message also starts

to appear along with the engine oil

life indicator and the maintenance

item codes.

The engine oil has almost reached

the end of its service life, and the

maintenance items should be

inspected and serviced as soon as

possible.

The remaining engine oil life has

passed its service life, and a

negative distance appears after

driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)

or 10 km (Canadian models). The

negative distance on the display

blinks.

The engine oil life has passed.

The maintenance items must be

inspected and serviced

immediately. Stays on as a reminder even when

the display is switched.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

383

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Continued

Maintenance

■Maintenance Service Items

1Maintenance Service Items

•Independent of the Maintenance Minder

information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

•Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000

km).

•Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if

they are noisy.

Maintenance Minder Message

Maintenance

Minder Indicator

Sub Items

Main Item

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the

engine oil every year.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE Maintenance Main Items

A●Replace engine oil*1

B●Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter

●Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary

●Check parking brake adjustment

●Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots

●Inspect suspension components

●Inspect driveshaft boots

●Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)

●Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids

●Inspect exhaust system#

●Inspect fuel lines and connections#

*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110ºF, 43ºC), in very low temperatures (under

-20ºF, -29ºC), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.

*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of

mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than

recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,

have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

1●Rotate tires

2●Replace air cleaner element*2

●Replace dust and pollen filter*3

●Inspect drive belt

3●Replace transmission and transfer* fluid

4●Replace spark plugs

●Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4

●Inspect valve clearance

5●Replace engine coolant

6●Replace VTM-4r* rear differential fluid*5

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

384

Maintenance

Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly

pressing the (Select/Reset) knob.

3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds

or more.

uThe information display shows the reset

mode initial display.

4. Press and hold the knob for five seconds

or more.

uThe displayed maintenance items

disappear and the engine oil life display

will return to 100%.

■Resetting the Display

1Resetting the Display

NOTICE

Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance

service results in the system showing incorrect

maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious

mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after

completing the required maintenance service. If

someone other than a dealer performs maintenance

service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.

Reset Mode Initial Display

Oil Life

Outside Temperature*

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

385

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Continued

Maintenance

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

2. Press the / button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears on the

multi-information display.

■Displaying the Engine Oil Life

Models with multi-information display

1Displaying the Engine Oil Life

Based on the engine operating conditions, the

remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed

as a percentage.

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you

can view on the multi-information display.

2Maintenance Service Items P. 387

Displayed Engine Oil

Life (%)

Calculated Engine Oil

Life (%)

100 100 to 91

90 90 to 81

80 80 to 71

70 70 to 61

60 60 to 51

50 50 to 41

40 40 to 31

30 30 to 21

20 20 to 16

15 15 to 11

10 10 to 6

55 to 1

SEL/RESET Button

Engine Oil Life

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

386

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

■Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information

Display

Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information

SERVICE DUE SOON 15% The remaining engine oil life is 15 to

6 percent. Once you switch the

display by pressing the /

(information) button, this message

will go off.

The engine oil is approaching the end

of its service life, and the maintenance

items should be inspected and serviced

soon.

SERVICE DUE NOW 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1

percent. Press the / button

to switch to another display.

The engine oil has almost reached the

end of its service life, and the

maintenance items should be inspected

and serviced as soon as possible.

SERVICE PAST DUE Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has

passed its service life, and a negative

distance appears after driving over

10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km

(Canadian models). Press the /

button to switch to another

display.

The engine oil life has passed.

The maintenance items must be

inspected and serviced immediately.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

387

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Continued

Maintenance

■Maintenance Service Items

1Maintenance Service Items

•Independent of the Maintenance Minder

information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

•Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000

km).

•Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3

only if they are noisy.

Maintenance Minder Message System Message

Indicator

Sub ItemsMain Item

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the

engine oil every year.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE Maintenance Main Items

A●Replace engine oil*1

B●Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter

●Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary

●Check parking brake adjustment

●Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots

●Inspect suspension components

●Inspect driveshaft boots

●Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)

●Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids

●Inspect exhaust system#

●Inspect fuel lines and connections#

*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110ºF, 43ºC), in very low temperatures (under

-20ºF, -29ºC), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.

*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of

mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than

recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,

have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

1●Rotate tires

2●Replace air cleaner element*2

●Replace dust and pollen filter*3

●Inspect drive belt

3●Replace transmission and transfer* fluid

4●Replace spark plugs

●Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4

●Inspect valve clearance

5●Replace engine coolant

6●Replace VTM-4r* rear differential fluid*5

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

388

Maintenance

Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly pressing the SEL/RESET button.

3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for 10 seconds or more.

uThe oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.

4. Select RESET with the / button, then press the SEL/RESET button.

uThe service code will disappear and the engine oil life display will return to 100%.

To cancel the oil life reset mode, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button.

■Resetting the Display

1Resetting the Display

NOTICE

Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance

service results in the system showing incorrect

maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious

mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after

completing the required maintenance service. If

someone other than a dealer performs maintenance

service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.

Maintenance Item Codes Engine Oil Life

(information)

Button

SEL/RESET

Button

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

389

Maintenance

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

Brake Fluid

(Black Cap)

Engine Coolant

Reservoir

Radiator Cap

Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)

Engine Oil Dipstick

(Orange Loop)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Dipstick (Yellow Loop)

Battery

Power Steering

Fluid (Red Cap)

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

390

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Maintenance

Opening the Hood

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set

the parking brake.

2. Pull the hood release handle under the

lower left corner of the dashboard.

uThe hood will pop up slightly.

3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center

of the hood to release the lock mechanism,

and open the hood.

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp

using the grip. Mount the support rod in

the hood.

When closing, remove the support rod, and

stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the

hood. Remove your hand at a height of

approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the

hood close.

1Opening the Hood

NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are

raised.

The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage

either the hood or the wipers.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is

securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can

open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch

mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Hood Release Handle

Pull

Lever

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

391

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Covers

Maintenance

Engine Compartment Covers

The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by two covers.You

may need to remove the covers when you perform certain maintenance work.To

remove the covers:

1Engine Compartment Covers

When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,

then lift and remove the center pin.

When mounting the clip, insert while keeping the

center pin of the clip raised, then push until the pin is

flat.

Center pin

Push until the

pin is flat.

Bulkhead Cover

Remove the holding clips.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

392

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Maintenance

Recommended Engine Oil

Oil is a major contributor to your engine's

performance and longevity. If you drive the

vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,

the engine may fail or be damaged.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving

and that it meets the American Petroleum

Institute’s latest requirements.

Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another

commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for

the ambient temperature as shown.

■Synthetic oil

You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal

and is the specified viscosity grade.

•Genuine Honda Motor Oil

•Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the

container.

1Recommended Engine Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,

they may adversely affect the engine performance

and durability.

Ambient Temperature

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

393

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Maintenance

Oil Check

We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check

the oil.

1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or

paper towel.

3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into

its hole.

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the

level. It should be between the upper and

lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

1Oil Check

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly

add oil being careful not to overfill.

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

394

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Maintenance

Adding Engine Oil

1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.

2. Add oil slowly.

3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten

it securely.

4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the

engine oil dipstick.

1Adding Engine Oil

If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may

damage the engine compartment components.

NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.

Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and

engine damage.

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

395

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Continued

Maintenance

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the

engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the

information display*/multi-information display*.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature, and then turn the

engine off.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil

fill cap.

3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from

the bottom of the engine, and drain the

oil into a suitable container.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not

dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are

changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of

the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take

it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away

into a garbage can or onto the ground.

Drain Bolt

Washer

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

396

Maintenance

4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the

remaining oil.

5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to

the engine contact surface.

uIf it is stuck, you must detach it.

6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the

contact surface of the engine block, and

install a new oil filter.

uApply a light coat of new engine oil to

the filter gasket.

7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then

reinstall the drain bolt.

uTightening torque:

29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)

8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the

engine.

uEngine oil change capacity (including

filter):

4.5 US qt (4.3 L)

9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and

start the engine.

10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and

then check that there is no leak from the

drain bolt or oil filter.

11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,

and then check the oil level on the

dipstick.

uIf necessary, add more engine oil.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil

filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the

instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The

low oil pressure indicator should go off within five

seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check

your work.

Oil Filter

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

397

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Continued

Maintenance

Engine Coolant

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any

straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the

reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the

radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1. Check the amount of coolant in the

reserve tank.

2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,

add the specified coolant until it reaches

the MAX mark.

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

■Reserve Tank

1Engine Coolant

NOTICE

If temperatures consistently below -22°F (-30°C) are

expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to

a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more

information.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may

use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a

temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality

coolant recommended for aluminum engines.

Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result

in corrosion, causing the cooling system to

malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed

and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as

possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your

vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible

with the coolant or with the engine components.

Reserve

Tank

MAX

MIN

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

398

Maintenance

1. Make sure the engine and radiator

are cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and

relieve any pressure in the coolant system.

Do not push the cap down when turning.

3. Push down and turn the radiator cap

counterclockwise to remove it.

4. The coolant level should be up to the base

of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten

it fully.

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it

reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back

on the reserve tank.

■Radiator

1Radiator

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill

any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can

damage components in the engine compartment.

WARNING

Removing the radiator cap while the

engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray

out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool

down before removing the radiator cap.

Radiator Cap

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

399

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Maintenance

Transmission Fluid

Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature.

1. Park on level ground, and start the engine.

2. Wait until the radiator fan starts and then

turn off the engine.

uPerform step 3 after waiting for about 60

seconds (less than 90 seconds).

3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the

transmission and wipe it with a clean cloth.

4. Insert the dipstick all the way back

into the transmission securely, as shown

in the image.

5. Remove the dipstick and check the

fluid level.

uIt should be between the upper and

lower marks in the HOT range.

6. If the level is below the lower mark,

add fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it

to the level between the upper and lower

marks, and have your vehicle checked by a

dealer immediately.

■Automatic Transmission Fluid

Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)

1Automatic Transmission Fluid

NOTICE

Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other

transmission fluids.

Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF

DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and

durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage

the transmission.

Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that

is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered

by Honda's new vehicle warranty.

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill

any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can

damage components in the engine compartment.

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

HOT

Range

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

400

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid

Maintenance

Brake Fluid

The fluid level should be between the MIN

and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

Power Steering Fluid

We recommend that you check the power steering fluid level every time you refuel.

Check when the engine is not running.

1. Look at the side of the reservoir. The fluid

should be between the UPPER LEVEL and

LOWER LEVEL.

2. Add power steering fluid if necessary to the

UPPER LEVEL mark.

uInspect the system for a leak. If the fluid

level goes below the LOWER LEVEL

frequently, have the system inspected as

soon as possible.

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■Checking the Brake Fluid

1Brake Fluid

NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your

vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive

damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should

use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed

container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion

and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the

brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy

Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,

have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as

soon as possible.

Brake Reservoir

MIN

MAX

Specified fluid: Honda Power Steering Fluid

1Power Steering Fluid

NOTICE

Turning the steering wheel to full left or right lock

and holding it there can damage the power steering

pump.

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill

any. Clean up any spills immediately; it could damage

components in the engine compartment.

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

401

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Maintenance

Refilling Window Washer Fluid

Check the amount of window washer fluid.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

If the washer fluid is low, the washer level indicator* appears on the instrument

panel or a message appears on the multi-information display*.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Models without washer level sensor

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water

solution in the windshield washer reservoir.

Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A

vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield

washer pump.

Models with washer level sensor

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

402

Maintenance

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlight Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the clips using a flat-tip

screwdriver, then remove the upper part of

the air intake duct.

2Engine Compartment Covers P. 391

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight

assembly and turn it to the right.

5. Insert the coupler into the connector of

the bulb.

High beam headlight: 60W (HB3)

Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11)

■High Beam Headlight

1Headlight Bulbs

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.

Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause

the bulb to overheat and shatter.

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not

need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry

heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have

the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified

technician.

The HB3 and H11 types are halogen bulbs.

When replacing a bulb, handle it by its base, and

protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard

objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with

denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

The exterior lights' inside lenses (headlights, brake

lights, etc.) may fog temporarily after a car wash or

while driving in the rain. This does not impact the

exterior light function.

However, if you see a large amount of water or ice

accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

Tab

Coupler

Bulb

Driver's side

Driver and passenger side

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 403

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs*

Maintenance

1. Remove the clips using a flat-tip

screwdriver, then remove the upper part of

the air intake duct.

2Engine Compartment Covers P. 391

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight

assembly and turn it to the right.

5. Insert the coupler into the connector of

Fog Light Bulbs*

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the clips using a flat-tip

screwdriver, and pull down the under

cover.

■Low Beam Headlights

Bulb

Tab Coupler

Driver's side

Driver and passenger side

Fog Light: 55 W (H11)

1Fog Light Bulbs*

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,

or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to

overheat and shatter.

The fog lights are halogen bulbs.

When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case,

and protect the glass from contact with your skin or

hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with

denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Clip

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

the bulb.

uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs*

404

Maintenance

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

4. Insert new bulb.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs*

Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and

replace the light bulbs.

Bulb

Coupler

Tab

1Fog Light Bulbs*

Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center

pin to remove the clip.

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push

until it is flat.

Center pin

Push until the

pin is flat.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

405

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light and Front Side Marker Light Bulbs

Maintenance

Front Turn Signal/Parking Light and

Front Side Marker Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Front Turn Signal/Parking Light: 28/8 W (Amber)

Front Side Marker Light: 3CP

Bulb

Socket

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

406

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

Maintenance

Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn

Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove

the bolts.

2. Loosen the assembly by carefully prying on

the top and side edges.

uWrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W

Back-Up Light: 18 W

Rear Turn Signal/Taillight: 21/5 W

Rear Side Marker Light: 5 W

Bolts

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

407

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

Maintenance

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

Remove the old bulb.

4. Insert a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the light assembly by sliding it into

the hole on the body.

Bulb

Socket

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

408

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulb

Maintenance

Rear License Plate Light Bulb

When replacing, use the following bulb.

1. Remove the lens by prying on the edge of

the lens using a flat-tip screwdriver.

uWrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

2. Remove the old bulb.

3. Insert a new bulb.

Rear License Plate Light: 5 W

Bulb

Lens

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

409

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHigh-Mount Brake Light Bulb

Maintenance

High-Mount Brake Light Bulb

When replacing, use the following bulb.

1. Remove the lens segment by prying on the

edge using a flat-tip screwdriver.

uWrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

2. Remove the screw under each lens.

3. Pull the high-mount brake light assembly

out of the vehicle.

4. Remove the two mounting screws from the

light assembly.

5. Remove the lens from the light assembly.

6. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

High-Mount Brake Light: 5 W

Screw

Lens Segment

Bulb

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

410

Maintenance

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades

If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper

arm may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the

passenger side.

2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the blade

from the wiper arm.

1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the

windshield.

Tab

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

411

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

Maintenance

3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by

pulling the tabbed end out.

4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade

that has been removed, and mount to a

new rubber blade.

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder

from the bottom end.

uThe tab on the holder should fit in the

indent of the wiper blade.

6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm

until it clicks.

7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,

then the driver side.

Blade

Retainer

Blade

Indent

Tab

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

412

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Maintenance

Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Raise the wiper arm off.

2. Pivot the bottom end of the wiper blade up

until it comes off from the wiper arm.

3. Slide the blade out of the wiper.

4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and

mount it to a new rubber blade.

1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper blade, it may damage the

rear window.

Wiper Blade

Wiper

Arm

Blade

Retainer

Rubber

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

413

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Maintenance

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder.

uMake sure it is engaged correctly, then

install the wiper blade assembly onto the

wiper arm.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

414

Maintenance

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in

good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

■Inflation guidelines

Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.

Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and

are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,

and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the

others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in

all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to

20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

■Inspection guidelines

Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.

Look for:

•Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,

splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.

•Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.

•Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.

•Excessive tread wear.

2Wear Indicators P. 419

•Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

1Checking Tires

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This

means the vehicle has been parked for at least three

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If

necessary, add or release air until the specified

pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as

4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if

checked when cold.

Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent

vibration while driving. New tires and any that have

been removed and reinstalled should be properly

balanced.

WARNING

Using tires that are excessively worn or

improperly inflated can cause a crash in

which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s

manual regarding tire inflation and

maintenance.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

415

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Continued

Maintenance

Tire and Loading Information Label

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading

information.

Tire Labeling

The tires that came on your vehicle have a

number of markings. Those you should be

aware of are described below.

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

1Tire and Loading Information Label

The tire and loading information label attached to the

driver’s doorjamb contains:

aThe number of people your vehicle can carry.

bThe total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight.

cThe original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.

dThe proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

Label

Example

Example Tire Size

Tire

Identification

Number (TIN)

Maximum

Tire Load

Maximum

Tire Pressure

Tire Size

■Tire Sizes

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an

explanation of what each component means.

P235/60 R18 102T

P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

235: Tire width in millimeters.

60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a

percentage of its width).

R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

18: Rim diameter in inches.

102: Load index (a numerical code associated with

the maximum load the tire can carry).

T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the

maximum speed rating).

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

416

Maintenance

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like

the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at

least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given

inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire

can hold.

Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum

permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended

by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves

designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

■Tire Identification Number (TIN)

■Glossary of Tire Terminology

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209

DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all

requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.

FW6X: Tire type code.

22 09: Date of manufacture.

Year

Week

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

417

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Continued

Maintenance

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are

also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according

to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between

shoulder and maximum section width.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire

tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as

well on the government course As a tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service

practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■Uniform Tire Quality Grading

■Treadwear

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example:

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to

Federal Safety Requirements in addition to

these grades.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

these gradings.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

418

Maintenance

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those

grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire' s

resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat tested

under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate

and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all

passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance

on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

■Traction

■Temperature

1Traction

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include

acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade fo r this ries

established for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can casue

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

419

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Maintenance

Wear Indicators

The groove where the wear indicator is

located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than

elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so

that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.

Worn out tires have poor traction on wet

roads.

Tire Service Life

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road

conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and

environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is

recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five

years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10

years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Example of a Wear

Indicator mark

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

420

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Maintenance

Tire and Wheel Replacement

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and

maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a

different size or construction can cause the ABS, VSA® (vehicle stability assist), hill

start assist, and the VTM-4r* system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the

front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

WARNING

Installing improper tires on your vehicle can

affect handling and stability. This can cause

a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or

killed.

Always use the size and type of tires

recommended in this owner’s manual.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

421

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Maintenance

Tire Rotation

Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display*/

multi-information display* helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

■Tires without rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.

■Tires with rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.

1Tire Rotation

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be

rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).

Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation

indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

When the tires are rotated, make sure the air

pressures are checked.

Front

Direction Mark

Front

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

422

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Maintenance

Winter Tires

If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked “M+S” tires, snow

tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles

when driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to

prevent skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires:

•Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.

•Mount the tires to all four wheels.

For tire chains:

•Install them on the front tires only.

•Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the

chains listed below:

•Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as

tightly as you can.

•Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.

•Drive slowly.

Cable-type: QCC Premium Cobra 1046P

1Winter Tires

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly

installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,

suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are

hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain

manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle

operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be

aware that these tires are not designed for winter

driving conditions. For more information, contact a

dealer.

WARNING

Using the wrong chains, or not properly

installing chains, can damage the brake

lines and cause a crash in which you can be

seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner's

manual regarding the selection and use of

tire chains.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

423

Maintenance

Battery

Checking the Battery

Check the battery condition monthly. Look at

the test indicator window and check the

terminals for corrosion.

If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:

•The audio system is disabled.

2Reactivating the audio system P. 174

•The clock resets.

2Setting the Clock P. 98

•The navigation system* is disabled.

2Refer to the navigation system manual

Charging the Battery

Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.

Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

1Battery

WARNING: Battery post, terminals,

and related accessories contain lead

and lead compounds.

Wash your hands after handling.

The test indicator's color information is on the

battery.

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals

by applying a baking powder and water solution.

Clean terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry

the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help

prevent future corrosion.

WARNING

The battery gives off explosive hydrogen

gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to

explode with enough force to kill or

seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery

maintenance, wear protective clothing and

a face shield, or have a skilled technician do

it.

Test Indicator Window

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

424

Maintenance

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Button Battery

If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips-

head screwdriver. Press a button to pry

open the transmitter.

2. Open the keypad.

uSeparate the inner cover from the

keypad by releasing the two tabs on

the cover.

3. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

1Replacing the Button Battery

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the

environment. Always confirm local regulations for

battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or

at a dealer.

Keypad

Screw

Battery type: CR1616

Battery

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

425

Continued

Maintenance

Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care*

Replacing the Battery

If it takes several pushes on the remote control buttons to operate the rear

entertainment system*.

1. Remove the cover.

2. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

■Remote Control

Models with rear entertainment system

1Replacing the Battery

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the

environment. Always confirm local regulations for

battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or

at a dealer.

Battery type: BR3032

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

426

uuRemote Control and Wireless Headphone Care*uReplacing the Battery

Maintenance

If there is no sound coming from the wireless headphone, replace the battery.

1. To open the cover, insert a coin in the slot

and twist it slightly to pry the cover away

from the earpiece.

2. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

■Wireless Headphone

Coin

Battery type: AAA

Battery

Cover

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

427

Maintenance

Climate Control System Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter

The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects

pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let

you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your

vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the climate control system

deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up

easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please

contact a dealer for replacement.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

428

Maintenance

Cleaning

Interior Care

Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.

Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.

Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

■Cleaning Seat Belts

1Interior Care

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.

Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if

liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices

such as audio devices and switches.

Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire

inside the vehicle.

If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on

electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and

liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,

and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.

Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as

benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them

off using a dry cloth.

Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts

or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

Opening

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

429

uuCleaninguInterior Care

Maintenance

The floor mats hook over the floor anchors,

which keep the mat from sliding forward.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of

the anchored mat.

Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats

and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and

10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or

dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

■Floor Mats

1Floor Mats

If you use any floor mats that were not originally

provided with your vehicle, make sure they are

designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and

are securely anchored by the floor anchors.

Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are

not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere

with the front seat functions.

Front

Rear

■Maintaining Genuine Leather*

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

430

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Maintenance

Exterior Care

Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.

Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a

painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the

following conditions:

•If driving on roads with road salt.

•If driving in coastal areas.

•If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

•Fold in the door mirrors.

Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.

•Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.

•Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to

enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.

■Washing the Vehicle

■Using an Automated Car Wash

■Using High Pressure Cleaners

1Washing the Vehicle

Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine

compartment. It can cause a malfunction.

Air Intake Vents

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

431

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Maintenance

A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the

elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the

elements, so reapply as necessary.

If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they

may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and

clean water.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road

contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.

Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or

a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that

helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.

■Applying Wax

■Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

■Cleaning the Window

■Maintaining Aluminum Wheels*

1Applying Wax

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage

the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up

spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when

you want to repair the painted surface of the parts

made of resin.

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.

Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a

soft cloth so as not to damage them.

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

432

Home

QRG

Index

433

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools

Types of Tools .................................. 434

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire......................... 435

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine........................ 444

Jump Starting.................................... 445

Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 447

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating............. 448

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes

On ............................................. 450

If the Charging System Indicator Comes

On ................................................. 450

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes

On or Blinks ................................... 451

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes

On ................................................. 452

If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes

On ................................................. 452

If the TPMS Indicator Comes On ...... 453

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Comes On or Blinks ....................... 453

Fuses

Fuse Locations ................................. 454

Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 458

Emergency Towing........................... 459

When You Cannot Open the Tailgate

..... 461

Home

QRG

Index

434

Handling the Unexpected

Tools

Types of Tools

1Types of Tools

The tools and jack are under the cargo area on the

passenger’s side.

Wheel Nut Wrench/

Jack Handle

Jack

Towing Hook

Stay Extension Bar

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

435

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake

gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a

compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire

repaired or replaced.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the

parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to (P.

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0.

1Changing a Flat Tire

Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact

spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.

Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the

vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with

a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are

specifically for this model.

Do not use them with another vehicle.

Do not use another type of compact spare tire or

wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.

If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of

the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact

spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it

with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.

Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire,

as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

436

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

1. Remove the cargo area floor lid.

2. Remove the cover and take the jack, stay,

wheel nut wrench, and extension bar out

of the tool case.

3. Remove the cover and the rubber cap on

the cargo area to access the shaft for the

spare tire hoist.

4. Fold down the third row seats.

2Folding Down the Third Row Seats

P. 147

■Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

Cover

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

437

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

5. Put the extension bar with the wheel nut

wrench on the hoist shaft.

Turn the wrench to the left to lower the

spare tire to the ground.

6. Keep turning the wheel nut wrench to

create slack in the cable.

7. Remove the bracket from the spare tire.

8. Place a wheel block or rock in front and

rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

Wheel Nut

Wrench

Extension Bar

Bracket

Wheel

Blocks

The tire to be replaced.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

438

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

9. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side

up) under the vehicle body, near the tire

that needs to be replaced.

10. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn

using the wheel nut wrench.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 439

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

1. Place the jack under the jacking point

closest to the tire to be changed.

2. Turn the dial at the bottom of the jack to

the right until the top of the jack contacts

the jacking point.

uMake sure that the jacking point tab is

resting in the jack notch.

■How to Set Up the Jack

1How to Set Up the Jack

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the

vehicle.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle.

Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or

their shape may not match.

The following instructions must be followed to use

the jack safely.

•Do not use while the engine is running.

•Use only where the ground is firm and level.

•Use only at the jacking points.

•Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.

•Do not put anything on top of or underneath the

jack.

WARNING

The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,

seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire

exactly, and never get under the vehicle

when it is supported only by the jack.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

440

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

3. Raise the vehicle, using the stay, extension bar, and the jack handle, until the tire

is off the ground.

Stay

Extension Bar

Wheel Nut

Wrench as Jack

Handle

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

Continued 441

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel

with a clean cloth.

3. Mount the compact spare tire.

4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch

the lips around the mounting holes, and

stop rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts in the order

indicated in the image. Go around,

tightening the nuts, two to three times in

this order.

Wheel nut torque:

94 lbf∙ft (127 N∙m, 13 kgf∙m)

■Replacing the Flat Tire

1Replacing the Flat Tire

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra

torque using your foot or a pipe.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

442

Handling the Unexpected

If you store a full size tire on the hoist, remove the spacer to loosen the two bolts.

1. Remove the center cap.

2. Place the flat tire face up under the hoist.

3. Insert the hoist bracket into the center hole

of the flat tire.

4. Turn the extension bar with the wheel nut

wrench to the right until the flat tire rests

against the underbody of the vehicle and

you hear the hoist click.

5. Securely put the jack, stay, extension

bar, and wheel nut wrench back in the

tool case.

■Storing the Flat Tire

1Storing the Flat Tire

Always raise the spare tire hoist, even if you are not

stowing a tire. If the hoist is left down, it will be

damaged during driving and need to be replaced.

WARNING

Loose items can fly around the interior in a

crash and can seriously injure the

occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely

before driving.

Bolts

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

443

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure indicator comes on

while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will go

off and the TPMS indicator comes on, but this is normal.

If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the low tire pressure or TPMS

indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).

If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator

comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the

indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. CHECK TPMS

SYSTEM appears on the multi-information display, but this is normal.

If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on the

multi-information display and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after

a few miles (kilometers).

■TPMS and the Spare Tire

1TPMS and the Spare Tire

The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare

tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure

that it is correct.

Use TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a

tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind

the valve stem.

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

444

Handling the Unexpected

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine

If the engine does not start, check the starter.

Starter condition Checklist

Starter doesn’t turn or turns

over slowly.

The battery may be dead. Check

each of the items on the right and

respond accordingly.

Check brightness of the interior light.

Turn on interior lights and check brightness.

●If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all

2Battery P. 423

●If the interior lights come on normally 2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 458

The starter turns over normally

but the engine doesn’t start.

There may be a problem with the

fuse. Check each of the items on

the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure.

Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 342

Check the immobilizer system indicator.

When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.

2Immobilizer System P. 118

Check the fuel level.

There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 80

Check the fuse.

Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

2Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 458

If the problem continues:

2Emergency Towing P. 459

1Checking the Engine

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an

assisting vehicle to jump start it.

2Jump Starting P. 445

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

445

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

Jump Starting

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,

then open the hood.

1. Connect the first jumper cable to your

vehicle's + terminal.

2. Connect the other end of the first jumper

cable to the booster battery + terminal.

uUse a 12-volt booster battery only.

3. Connect the second jumper cable to the

booster battery - terminal.

4. Connect the other end of the second

jumper cable to the grounding strap as

shown.

Do not connect this jumper cable to any

other part.

5. If your vehicle is connected to another

vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine

and increase its rpm slightly.

6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it

turns over slowly, check that the jumper

cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

■Jump Starting Procedure

1Jump Starting

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they

do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be

careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the

cable ends to touch each other while attaching or

detaching the jumper cables.

Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and

may prevent the engine from starting.

WARNING

A battery can explode if you do not follow

the correct procedure, seriously injuring

anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking

materials away from the battery.

Booster Battery

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

446

uuJump Startingu

Handling the Unexpected

Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following

order.

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.

2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -

terminal.

3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's + terminal.

4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +

terminal.

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

■What to Do After the Engine Starts

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

447

Handling the Unexpected

Shift Lever Does Not Move

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the

(P position.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-

tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock

release slot as shown in the image, and

remove the cover.

4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.

5. While pushing on the key, press the shift

lever release button and place the shift lever

into (N.

uThe lock is now released. Have the shift

lever checked by a dealer as soon as

possible.

■Releasing the Lock

Slot

Cover

Release Button

Shift Lock

Release Slot

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

448

Handling the Unexpected

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating

Overheating symptoms are as follows:

•The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly

loses power.

•Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

■First thing to do

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.

uNo steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.

uSteam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.

Then, open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge

needle at the mark may damage the engine.

WARNING

Steam and spray from an overheated

engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming

out.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

449

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

Handling the Unexpected

■Next thing to do

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and

stop the engine once the temperature

gauge needle comes down.

uIf the cooling fan is not operating,

immediately stop the engine.

2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect

the coolant level and check the cooling

system components for leaks.

uIf the coolant level in the reserve tank is

low, add coolant until it reaches the

MAX mark.

uIf there is no coolant in the reserve tank,

check that the radiator is cool. Cover the

radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open

the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to

the base of the filler neck, and put the

cap back on.

■Last thing to do

Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.

If the temperature needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down,

contact a dealer for repairs.

1How to Handle Overheating

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.

Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze

as soon as possible.

WARNING

Removing the radiator cap while the

engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray

out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool

down before removing the radiator cap.

Reserve

Tank

MAX

MIN

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

450

Handling the Unexpected

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

■What to do as soon as the indicator comes on

1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.

2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.

■What to do after parking the vehicle

1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes.

2. Open the hood and check the oil level.

2Oil Check P. 393

3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.

uThe light goes out: Start driving again.

uThe light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and

contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when the battery is not being charged.

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical

systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause

serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the

engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge

the battery.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

451

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

Handling the Unexpected

If the Malfunction Indicator

Lamp Comes On or

Blinks

■Reasons for indicator lamp to come on or blink

•Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control

system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.

•Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.

■What to do when the indicator lamp comes on

Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a

dealer.

■What to do when the indicator lamp blinks

Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least

ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

■The message appears on when:

An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being

loose or not being installed.

■What to do when the message appears:

1. Stop the engine.

2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.

uIf not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.

3. Drive for several days of normal driving.

uThe message should go off.

■When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of

gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures

described above.

■Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,

the emissions control system and the engine could be

damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when

restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at

31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle

inspected.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

452

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

Handling the Unexpected

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

•The brake fluid is low.

•There is a malfunction in the brake system.

■What to do when the indicator comes on while driving

Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.

•If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.

•If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the

transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

A tire pressure is significantly low. If the compact spare tire is

installed, the indicator stays on for a while, then goes off after driving

a few miles (kilometers).

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the

pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on

the driver side doorjamb.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

Have your vehicle repaired immediately.

It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there

is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop

immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift

the gears.

If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come

on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution

system is not working. This can result in vehicle

instability under sudden braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

U.S.

Canada

Models with information display

1If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause

it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always

inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

453

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the TPMS Indicator Comes On

Handling the Unexpected

If the TPMS Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

•Comes on when there is a problem with the TPMS.

•If the compact spare is installed, the indicator comes on after driving

for a few miles (kilometers).

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact

spare tire causes the indicator to come on, change the tire to a full-size

tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or

Blinks

■Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS or

the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one

minute, and then stays on.

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the

pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on

the driver side doorjamb.

■What to do when the indicator blinks

Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact

spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full- size tire.

The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause

it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always

inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

454

Handling the Unexpected

Fuses

Fuse Locations

If any electrical devices are not working,

turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and

check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box

cover. Locate the fuse in question by the

fuse number and box cover number.

Located on the passenger’s side, near the

windshield washer reservoir. Push the tabs

to open the box.

■Engine Compartment Fuse Box

■Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps

1Main Fuse 120 A

− −

2OP Main 80 A

IG Main 50 A

3Blower 40 A

AC Inverter 30 A

4Head Light Main 50 A

Power Window Main 40 A

5 − −

6 Condenser Fan 30 A

7Cooling Fan 30 A

8 Rear Defogger 30 A

9 − −

10 Fog Lights*(20 A)

11 Sub 15 A

12 ACM 10 A

13 Front Passenger’s Power

Seat Reclining*(20 A)

14 Front Passenger’s Power

Seat Slide*(20 A)

15 Oil Level 7.5 A

16 FI ECU (7.5 A)

17 Radio 20 A

18 IG Coil 15 A

19 Main 15 A

20 MG Clutch 7.5 A

21 DBW 15 A

22 Interior Lights 7.5 A

23 Back Up 10 A

Circuit Protected Amps

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

455

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

Located near the battery. Push the tabs to

open the box.

■Engine Compartment

Sub Fuse Box

■Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps

1Power Tailgate Motor*(40 A)

2VTM-4

*(20 A)

3Trailer Main (30 A)

VSA FSR 40 A

Rear Blower 30 A

6VSA Motor 30A

7Hazard 15 A

8 Power Tailgate Closer*(20 A)

9Driver’s Power Seat

Reclining*(20 A)

10 Driver’s Power Seat Slide*(20 A)

11 Stop & Horn 20 A

12 Rear Console Accessory

Socket 15 A

13 Rear Wiper 10 A

14 Trailer E-Brake (20 A)

15 Front Heated Seat*(20 A)

16 Center Console Accessory

Socket 15 A

17 Trailer Charge (20 A)

18 Front Accessory Socket 15 A

19 Rear Accessory Socket 15 A

20 Glass Hatch Motor 20 A

21 Rear Heated Seat*(15 A)

22 Head Light Washer Motor (30 A)

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

456

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Handling the Unexpected

Located under the dashboard.

Fuse locations are shown on the label on

the side panel.

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse

number and label number.

■Circuit protected and fuse rating

■Interior Fuse Box

Fuse Box

Circuit Protected Amps

1VTM-4*(7.5 A)

2Fuel Pump 20 A

3ACG 10 A

4VSA 7.5 A

5 − −

6 − −

7Auto Light 10 A

8Auto Light 7.5 A

9ODS 7.5 A

10 Meter 7.5 A

11 SRS 10 A

12 Right Daytime Running

Light 10 A

13 Left Daytime Running Light 10 A

14 Small Lights (Interior) 7.5 A

15 Small Lights (Exterior) 10 A

16 Right Head Light Low 15 A

17 Left Head Light Low 15 A

18 Daytime Running Light

Main 20 A

19 Small Lights Main 15 A

20 − −

TPMS 7.5 A

21 Head Light Low Main 20 A

22 VBSOL2 7.5 A

23 STRLD 7.5 A

24 − −

25 − −

26 Driver’s Power Window 20 A

27 HAC OP 20 A

28 Moonroof (20 A)

29 Door Lock 20 A

30 Front Passenger’s Power

Window 20 A

31 Audio Amp (30 A)

Circuit Protected Amps

32 Passenger’s Side Rear

Power Window 20 A

33 Driver’s Side Rear Power

Window 20 A

34 − −

35 ACC 10 A

36 HAC 10 A

37 Day Light 7.5 A

38 Wiper 30 A

Circuit Protected Amps

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

457

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Handling the Unexpected

Located on the left side of cargo area.

Remove the cover by prying on the edge of

the cover using a flat-tip screwdriver.

uWrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a

cloth to prevent scratches.

Fuse locations are shown on the fuse

box cover.

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse

number and box cover number.

■Circuit protected and fuse rating

■Cargo Area Fuse Box

Circuit Protected Amps

1Small Light 20 A

2Stop Light (7.5 A)

3Back Light (7.5 A)

4Turn Light Hazard (7.5 A)

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

458

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Handling the Unexpected

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0. Turn

headlights and all accessories off.

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Check the large fuse in the engine

compartment.

uIf the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head

screwdriver to remove the screw and

replace it with a new one.

4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine

compartment and the vehicle interior.

uIf there is a burned out fuse, remove it

with the fuse puller and replace it with a

new one.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating

greatly increases the chances of damaging the

electrical system.

Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified

amperage.

Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on

P. 454 to 457.

There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine

compartment fuse box cover.

Blown Fuse

Fuse Puller

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

459

Handling the Unexpected

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

■Flat bed equipment

The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

■Wheel lift equipment

The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off

the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to

tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing

NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will

cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed

to support the vehicle's weight.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.

It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift

from side to side or break.

All models

2WD models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

460

uuEmergency TowinguIf Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Handling the Unexpected

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

For very short distances, such as freeing the vehicle, you can use the detachable

towing hook that mounts on the anchors in the front and rear bumpers.

1. Put cloth on the edge of the cover.

Carefully pry with a small flat-tip

screwdriver or a metal fingernail file to

remove the cover.

uThe cover is attached to the bumper by a

tether.

2. Remove the rubber cap by pulling it out.

3. Remove the towing hook and wheel

wrench from the tool case in the cargo

area.

4. Screw the towing hook into the hole, and

tighten it with the wheel nut wrench.

Remove the rear bumper cover.

2Towing Equipment and Accessories P. 333

1If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

NOTICE

To avoid damage to your vehicle, use the towing

hook for straight, flat ground towing only. Do not

tow at an angle. The hook should not be used to tow

the vehicle onto a flat bed. Do not use it as a tie

down.

Cover

Front

Towing Hook

Rear

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

461

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

When You Cannot Open the Tailgate

If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure.

1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the

cover on the inside of the tailgate.

2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate

while sliding the lever to the right.

■What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate

1What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate

What to do-Following up

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the

vehicle checked.

When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure

there is enough space around the tailgate, and it

does not hit anyone or any object.

Cover

Models with power tailgate

Lever

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

462

uuWhen You Cannot Open the Tailgateu

Handling the Unexpected

2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate

while pushing down the lever with the flat-

tip screwdriver.

Models without power tailgate

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

463

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other

information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 464

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 466

Engine Number and Transmission

Number...................................... 466

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 467

Reporting Safety Defects ................. 469

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 470

Warranty Coverages ........................ 472

Authorized Manuals......................... 474

Customer Service Information......... 475

Gracenote® End User License

Agreement...................................476

Home

QRG

Index

464

Information

Specifications

■Vehicle Specifications

*1: 2WD models

*2: 4WD models

*3: LX models with 4WD

*4: Except LX models with 4WD

Model Honda Pilot

No. of Passengers:

Front 2

Second 3

Third 3

Total 8

Weights:

Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating

U.S.: 5,953 lbs (2,700 kg)*1

6,096 lbs (2,765 kg)*2

Canada: 2,700 kg*1

2,765 kg*2

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Front)

U.S.: 2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)

Canada: 1,325 kg

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Rear)

U.S.: 3,197 lbs (1,450 kg)*1

3,251 lbs (1,475 kg)*3

3,362 lbs (1,525 kg)*4

Canada: 1,450 kg*1

1,525 kg*2

Air Conditioning:

Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)

Charge Quantity 21.2 – 22.9 oz (600 – 650 g)

Lubricant Type ND-OIL8

■Engine Specifications

■Fuel

■Battery

■Washer Fluid

Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)

Spark Plugs NGK DILZKR7A11G

Fuel:

Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number

of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 21.0 US gal (79.5 ℓ)

Capacity/Type 60AH(5)/72AH(20)

Tank Capacity U.S.: 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)

Canada: 6.9 US qt (6.5 ℓ)

■Light Bulbs

*5: Not available on all models

Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)

Headlights (High Beam) 60 W (HB3)

Daytime Running Lights 60 W (HB3)

Fog Lights*5 55W (H11)

Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights 28/8W (Amber)

Side Turn Signal Lights

(on Door Mirrors)*5 LED

Front Side Marker Lights 3CP

Rear Side Marker Lights 5W

Brake/Taillights 21/5W

Back-Up Lights 18W

Rear Turn Signal/Taillights 21/5W

High-Mount Brake Light 5W

Rear License Plate Light 5W

Interior Lights

Map Lights (Front) 8W

Map Lights (Rear) 4CP

Door Courtesy Lights 2CP

Console Compartment

Light 1.4W

Glove Box Light 1.4W

Foot Light LED

Cargo Area Light 8W

Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

465

uuSpecificationsu

Information

■Brake Fluid

■Automatic Transmission Fluid

*1: 2WD models

*2: 4WD models

■Rear Differential Fluid*

■Transfer Assembly Fluid*

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified Honda ATF DW-1

(automatic transmission fluid)

Capacity Change 3.2 US qt (3.1 ℓ)*1

3.6 US qt (3.4 ℓ)*2

Specified Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid

Capacity Change 2.79 US qt (2.64 ℓ)

Specified HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL4 or GL5

SAE75W-85 (SAE90 CAN BE USED)

Capacity Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 ℓ)

■Engine Oil

■Engine Coolant

Recommended ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20

·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Capacity

Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)

Change

including

filter

4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)

Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

1.98 US gal (7.5 ℓ)

(change including the remaining

0.198 US gal (0.75 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

■Tire

*3: U.S. LX

*4: Except U.S. LX

Regular

Size P235/65R/17 103T*3

P235/60R/18 102T*4

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Front 31 (210 [2.1])*3

35 (240 [2.4])*4

Rear 33 (230 [2.3])*3

35 (240 [2.4])*4

Compact

Spare

Size T165/80D17 104M

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) 60 (420 [4.2])

Wheel Size Regular 17 x 7.5J*3

18 x 7.5J*4

Compact Spare 17 x 4T

* Not available on all models

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

466

Information

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your

vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the

image below for the VIN locations.

Engine Number and Transmission Number

See the image below for the locations of your vehicle's engine number and

transmission number.

Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number

Certification Label/

Vehicle Identification Number

Automatic Transmission Number

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

467

Continued

Information

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.

Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required

standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada

Standard, described below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to

operate the equipment.

Audio System

Bluetooth® Audio

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Immobilizer System

Parking Sensor System

Remote Transmitter

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Rear Entertainment System Remote Control

Models with Parking Sensor System

Models with Rear Entertainment System

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

468

uuDevices that Emit Radio Wavesu

Information

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

469

Information

Reporting Safety Defects

In the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists

in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may:

call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to

http://www.safercar.gov ;

or write to: Administrator, NHTSA

1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,

Washington, DC 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada

cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For

more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety

.Home

QRG

Index

TOC

470

Information

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

Your vehicle uses “readiness codes,” as part of its onboard self diagnostic system.

Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle's emissions

components are working properly.

The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has

gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w, without starting the

engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then

goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are

not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,

prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.

2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.

3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).

4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for

5. Keep the vehicle in (P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there

for about 3 minutes.

6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

1Testing of Readiness Codes

The readiness codes are erased when the battery is

disconnected, and set again only after several days of

driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness

codes are not set, you may be requested to return at

a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes

are still not set, see a dealer.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

20 seconds.

471

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

Information

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed

of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in

(D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without

moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you

cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for

at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions

allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal

or the brake pedal.

9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

472

Information

Warranty Coverages

■U.S. Owners

Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the

emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and

workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance

Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.

Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for

exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered

by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for

rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this

warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other

factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts

against defects in materials and workmanship.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

473

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Information

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a

replacement battery purchased from a dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as

long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2013 Honda

warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on

warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.

Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■Canadian Owners

Please refer to the 2013 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

474

Information

Authorized Manuals

■For U.S. Owners:

The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can

order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at

www.helminc.com.

Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering

other models' or other years' manuals.

Publication

Form Number Form Description

61SZA04 2013 Honda Pilot Service Manual

61SZA04EL 2013 Honda Pilot Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

61SZA40 2013 Honda Pilot Body Repair Manual

31SZA640 2013 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual

31SZA840 2013 Honda Pilot Navigation System Owner’s Manual

31SZAM40 2013 Honda Pilot Service History

31SZAA40 2013 Honda Pilot Technology Reference Guide

(LX/EX/EX-L/EX-L with RES)

31SZAB40 2013 Honda Pilot Technology Reference Guide

(EX-L with Navigation)

31SZAC40 2013 Honda Pilot Technology Reference Guide (Touring)

HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate Year and Model Desired

1Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures

for repair to engine and chassis components. It is

written for the journeyman technician, but it is simple

enough for most mechanically inclined owners to

understand.

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-

depth troubleshooting information for each electrical

circuit in your vehicle.

Body Repair Manual:

Describes the procedures involved in the replacement

of damaged body parts.

For Canadian Owners:

Si vous avez besoin d'un Manuel du Conducteur en

français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire

de commander le numéro de pièce 33SZAC40

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

475

Information

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.

They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that

your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the

dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the

decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners:

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Honda Automobile Customer Services

Mail Stop 500-2N-7A

1919 Torrance Blvd.

Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners:

Honda Canada Inc.

Customer Relations

180 Honda Boulevard

Markham, ON

L6C 0H9

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: 1-877-939-0909

E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

In Puerto Rico and the

U.S. Virgin Islands:

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

1Customer Service Information

When you call or write, please give us the following

information:

•Vehicle Identification Number

2Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

P. 466

•Date of purchase

•Odometer reading of your vehicle

•Your name, address, and telephone number

•A detailed description of the problem

•Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

476

Information

Gracenote® End User License Agreement

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,

California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”)

enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-

related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote

Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote

Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by

means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only.

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any

Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT

GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,

EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these

restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote

reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the

Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will

Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you

provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this

Agreement against you directly in its own name.

1Gracenote® End User License Agreement

Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB)

Music recognition technology and related data are

provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry

standard in music recognition technology and related

content delivery. For more information, please visit

www. gracenote.com.

When music is recorded to the HDD from a CD,

information such as the recording artist and track

name are retrieved from the Gracenote Database and

displayed (when available). Gracenote may not

contain information for all albums.

Gracenote is an internet-based music recognition

service that allows artist, album, and track

information from CDs to display on the HDD. More

information about Gracenote is available at

www.honda.com/ (in U.S.) or www.honda.ca (in

Canada).

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

477

uuGracenote® End User License Agreementu

Information

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical

purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the

Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are.

For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the

Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you

“AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied,

regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to

change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No

warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free

or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be

uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or

additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and

is free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT

WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL

GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR

FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

1Gracenote® End User License Agreement

Gracenote. One or more patents owned by

Gracenote apply to this product and service.

See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list

of applicable Gracenote patents.

Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the

Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by

Gracenote” logo are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or

other countries.

Home

QRG

Index

TOC

478

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 362

AC Power Outlet....................................... 158

Accessories and Modifications................. 375

Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 156

Additives

Coolant ................................................... 397

Engine Oil................................................ 392

Washer.................................................... 401

Additives, Engine Oil................................ 392

Adjusting

Armrest ................................................... 149

Front Seats .............................................. 137

Head Restraints........................................ 141

Mirrors .................................................... 135

Rear Seats................................................ 146

Steering Wheel ........................................ 134

Temperature.............................................. 87

Air Conditioning System

(Climate Control System)........................ 165

Changing the Mode ................................ 165

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows ............................................... 166

Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 427

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 165

Sensors.................................................... 170

Synchronized Mode ................................. 167

Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 165

Air Pressure ....................................... 415, 465

Airbags........................................................ 37

Advanced Airbags ..................................... 43

After a Collision ........................................ 41

Airbag Care............................................... 51

Event Data Recorder.................................. 20

Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 40

Indicator........................................ 48, 71, 75

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 49

Sensors ..................................................... 37

Side Airbag Cutoff System......................... 46

Side Airbag Off Indicator ........................... 50

Side Airbags .............................................. 44

Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 47

AM/FM Radio.................................... 186, 219

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 362

Indicator.................................................... 71

Armrest ..................................................... 149

Audio Remote Controls ................... 184, 217

Audio System............................................ 172

Adjusting the Sound........................ 185, 218

Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 173

Error Messages........................................ 266

General Information ................................ 272

iPod®....................................................... 240

MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 207, 244

Reactivating ............................................ 174

Recommended CDs................................. 273

Recommended Devices............................ 275

Remote Controls ............................. 184, 217

Security Code.......................................... 174

Theft Protection ...................................... 174

USB Adapter Cable ................................. 173

USB Flash Drives...................................... 275

Audio/Information Display ...................... 176

Authorized Manuals ................................ 474

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 105

Customize ........................................ 93, 106

Automatic Lighting.................................. 126

Automatic Transmission .......................... 345

Creeping................................................. 345

Fluid ....................................................... 399

Kickdown ............................................... 345

Operating the Shift Lever .................. 14, 347

Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 447

Shifting................................................... 346

Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 173

Average Fuel Economy ........................ 82, 88

Average Speed ................................... 88, 177

Battery ...................................................... 423

Charging System Indicator ................ 69, 450

Jump Starting ......................................... 445

Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 423

Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 424

Belts (Seat).................................................. 29

Beverage Holders..................................... 154

Bluetooth® Audio............................. 211, 248

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®............. 278, 301

Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 64

Home

QRG

INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

479

Brake System ............................................ 360

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 362

Brake Assist System................................. 363

Fluid ....................................................... 400

Foot Brake .............................................. 361

Indicator ........................................... 68, 452

Parking Brake.......................................... 360

Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 130

Bulb Replacement.................................... 402

Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light,

Rear Turn Signal Light and

Rear Side Marker Light .......................... 406

Fog Lights ............................................... 403

Front Turn Signal/Parking Light and

Front Side Marker Light......................... 405

Headlights .............................................. 402

High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 409

Rear License Plate Light........................... 408

Side Turn Signal/

Emergency Indicator Light ..................... 404

Bulb Specifications................................... 464

Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 65

Cargo Hook .............................................. 160

Cargo Net ................................................. 159

Carrying Cargo ................................. 325, 327

CD Library................................................. 197

CD Player .......................................... 193, 226

Certification Label ................................... 466

Changing Bulbs......................................... 402

Charging System Indicator................. 69, 450

Child Safety................................................. 52

Childproof Door Locks ............................. 104

Child Seat .................................................... 52

Booster Seats............................................. 64

Child Seat for Infants................................. 54

Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 55

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 60

Larger Children.......................................... 63

Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 54

Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 56

Childproof Door Locks ............................. 104

Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 430

Cleaning the Interior................................ 428

Climate Control System............................ 165

Changing the Mode ................................ 165

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows ............................................... 166

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 427

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 165

Sensors.................................................... 170

Synchronized Mode ................................. 167

Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 165

Clock............................................................ 98

Coat Hook ................................................. 159

Compact Spare Tire .......................... 435, 465

Console Compartment ............................. 152

Controls....................................................... 97

Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 397

Adding to the Radiator............................ 398

Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 397

Overheating ............................................ 448

Creeping (Automatic Transmission) ........ 345

Cruise Control........................................... 348

Indicator.................................................... 77

Cup Holders .............................................. 154

Customer Service Information................. 475

Customized Features.................................. 90

Daytime Running Lights .......................... 127

Dead Battery............................................. 445

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows ................................................. 166

Detachable Anchor .................................... 34

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 467

Dimming

Headlights............................................... 125

Rearview Mirror....................................... 135

Dipstick (Engine Oil)................................. 393

Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 125

Display/Information Button....................... 85

Door Mirrors............................................. 136

Doors........................................................... 99

Auto Door Locking .................................. 105

Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 105

Door Open Indicator............................ 28, 72

Keys.......................................................... 99 Home

QRG

Index

INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

480

Locking/Unlocking the Doors

from the Inside ...................................... 103

Locking/Unlocking the Doors

from the Outside ................................... 101

Lockout Prevention System ...................... 102

DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 417

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 137

Driving....................................................... 323

Automatic Transmission........................... 345

Braking.................................................... 360

Cruise Control ......................................... 348

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............... 340

Shifting Gear ........................................... 346

Starting the Engine .................................. 342

Driving Position Memory System............. 132

Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 427

Elapsed Time ....................................... 88, 177

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 352

Emergency................................................. 459

Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 470

Engine ....................................................... 466

Coolant ................................................... 397

Jump Starting .......................................... 445

Oil ........................................................... 392

Starting ................................................... 342

Switch Buzzer .......................................... 124

Engine Coolant ......................................... 397

Adding to the Radiator ............................ 398

Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 397

Overheating ............................................ 448

Temperature Gauge .................................. 80

Engine Oil ................................................. 392

Adding.................................................... 394

Checking................................................. 393

Displaying Oil Life............................ 381, 385

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 68, 450

Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 392

Exhaust Gas Hazard

(Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 65

Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 430

Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 136

Features .................................................... 171

Filters

Dust and Pollen ....................................... 427

Oil........................................................... 395

Flat Tire ..................................................... 435

Floor Mats................................................. 429

Fluids

Automatic Transmission .......................... 399

Brake ...................................................... 400

Engine Coolant ....................................... 397

Power Steering........................................ 400

Windshield Washer ................................. 401

Fog Light Indicator..................................... 75

Folding Down the Rear Seats .. 146, 147, 148

Foot Brake ................................................ 361

Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 40

Front Seats................................................ 137

Adjusting ................................................ 137

Fuel ..................................................... 15, 371

Economy................................................. 374

Gauge ...................................................... 80

Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 82, 88

Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 70

Range ................................................. 82, 88

Recommendation.................................... 371

Refueling ................................................ 371

Fuel Economy ........................................... 374

Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 15, 373

Message ................................................. 451

Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 15, 372

Fuses ......................................................... 454

Inspecting and Changing ........................ 458

Locations ........................ 454, 455, 456, 457

Gasoline (Fuel)

Economy................................................. 374

Gauge ...................................................... 80

Information............................................. 371

Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 82, 88

Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 70

Refueling ................................................ 371

Gauges........................................................ 80

Gear Shift Lever Positions

Automatic Transmission .......................... 346

Home

QRG

Index

INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

481

Index

Glass (care) ............................................... 431

Glove Box ................................................. 152

Halogen Bulbs .................................. 402, 403

Handling the Unexpected ....................... 433

HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ...................... 278, 301

Automatic Answering ............................. 289

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and

Call History ................................... 291, 312

Automatic Transferring ................... 289, 311

HFL Buttons .................................... 278, 301

HFL Menus...................................... 280, 303

HFL Status Display........................... 279, 302

Making a Call ................................. 295, 316

Options During a Call...................... 300, 319

Phone Setup ................................... 283, 305

Receiving a Call............................... 299, 319

Speed Dial ...................................... 292, 313

To Clear the System ........................ 290, 312

To Create a Security PIN.................. 288, 310

Hazard Warning Button .............................. 2

Head Restraints ........................................ 141

Headlights ................................................ 125

Aiming.................................................... 402

Automatic Operation .............................. 126

Dimming......................................... 125, 127

Operating ............................................... 125

Heaters (Seat)........................................... 162

HFL (HandsFreeLink®)...................... 278, 301

High Beam Indicator .................................. 75

Hill Start Assist System ............................. 343

Identification Numbers ............................ 466

Engine and Transmission ......................... 466

Vehicle Identification ............................... 466

Ignition Switch.......................................... 124

Illumination Control ................................. 130

Knob ....................................................... 130

Immobilizer System .................................. 118

Indicator.................................................... 76

Indicators .................................................... 68

A/T Temperature ....................................... 73

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..................... 71

Charging System ............................... 69, 450

CRUISE CONTROL.............................. 77, 349

CRUISE MAIN .................................... 77, 348

Door Open .......................................... 28, 72

Fog Light ................................................... 75

Fuel Economy ............................................ 76

High Beam ................................................ 75

Immobilizer System.................................... 76

Lights On................................................... 75

Low Fuel.................................................... 70

Low Oil Pressure ................................ 68, 450

Low Tire Pressure....................... 74, 355, 357

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ..................... 74, 355

Maintenance Minder ......................... 77, 381

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 69, 451

Parking Brake and Brake System........ 68, 452

Power Tailgate .......................................... 77

Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 30, 70

Security System Alarm ............................... 76

Shift Lever Position .................................... 69

Side Airbag Off ................................... 50, 75

Starter System........................................... 76

Supplemental Restraint System............ 48, 71

System Message........................................ 73

Tailgate Open............................................ 72

TPMS ................................................ 74, 358

Transmission ............................................. 70

Turn Signal................................................ 75

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)

System ............................................ 72, 352

VSA® OFF .......................................... 72, 353

VTM-4® System ................................. 71, 354

Washer Level............................................. 77

Information .............................................. 463

Information Display ................................... 81

Instant Fuel Economy........................... 82, 88

Instrument Panel........................................ 67

Brightness Control................................... 130

Integrated Sunshades .............................. 164

Interior Lights........................................... 150

Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 135

iPod®......................................................... 240

Home

QRG

Index

INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

482

Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)......................... 439

Jump Starting............................................ 445

Key Number Tag ....................................... 100

Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 102

Keys ............................................................. 99

Lockout Prevention.................................. 102

Master Keys............................................... 99

Number Tag ............................................ 100

Rear Door Won’t Open ............................ 104

Remote Transmitter ................................. 101

Types and Functions .................................. 99

Valet Key................................................. 100

Won’t Turn................................................ 18

Kickdown (Automatic Transmission)....... 345

Language (HFL)................................. 279, 302

LATCH (Child Seats) .............................. 57, 61

Lights ................................................. 125, 402

Automatic ............................................... 126

Bulb Replacement.................................... 402

Daytime Running Lights........................... 127

Fog Lights................................................ 127

High Beam Indicator .................................. 75

Interior .................................................... 150

Light Switches ......................................... 125

Lights On Indicator .................................... 75

Turn Signals ............................................ 125

Load Limits................................................ 327

Locking/Unlocking...................................... 99

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 105

Childproof Door Locks............................. 104

From Inside ............................................. 103

From Outside .......................................... 101

Keys .......................................................... 99

Using a Key ............................................. 102

Lockout Prevention System ..................... 102

Low Battery Charge ................................. 450

Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 70

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 68, 450

Lower Anchors...................................... 57, 61

Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 327

Maintenance............................................. 377

Battery .................................................... 423

Brake Fluid .............................................. 400

Cleaning ................................................. 428

Climate Control System........................... 427

Coolant................................................... 397

Maintenance Minder™ ........................... 381

Oil........................................................... 393

Power Steering Fluid................................ 400

Precautions ............................................. 378

Radiator .................................................. 398

Remote Control....................................... 425

Remote Transmitter ................................ 424

Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 402

Safety ..................................................... 379

Service Items................................... 383, 387

Tires........................................................ 414

Transmission Fluid................................... 399

Under the Hood...................................... 389

Wireless Headphone ............................... 426

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 69, 451

Map Lights................................................ 151

Maximum Load Limit............................... 327

Meters, Gauges .......................................... 80

Mirrors ...................................................... 135

Adjusting ................................................ 135

Door ....................................................... 136

Exterior ................................................... 136

Interior Rearview..................................... 135

Modifications (and Accessories).............. 375

Moonroof ................................................. 123

MP3................................... 193, 207, 226, 244

Multi-Information Display......................... 85

Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 370

Numbers (Identification) ......................... 466

Home

QRG

Index

INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

483

Odometer ............................................. 81, 86

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines............. 340

Oil (Engine) .............................................. 392

Adding ................................................... 394

Checking ................................................ 393

Displaying Oil Life ........................... 381, 385

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 68, 450

Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 392

Viscosity.................................................. 392

Opening/Closing

Hood ...................................................... 390

Moonroof ............................................... 123

Power Windows...................................... 120

Tailgate................................................... 110

Outside Temperature Display ............. 84, 87

Overheating ............................................. 448

Panic Mode............................................... 119

Parking ..................................................... 364

Parking Brake........................................... 360

Parking Brake and

Brake System Indicator .................... 68, 452

Parking Sensor System............................. 365

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator................. 49

Passing Indicators..................................... 125

Power Tailgate ......................................... 112

Power Windows ....................................... 120

Precautions While Driving....................... 344

Driving Guidelines

for Your Utility Vehicle ........................... 344

Rain......................................................... 344

Pregnant Women ....................................... 35

Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 435

Radiator .................................................... 398

Radio (AM/FM).................................. 186, 219

Radio (XM®).............................................. 223

Radio Data System (RDS).................. 189, 222

Range .................................................... 82, 88

RDS (Radio Data System).................. 189, 222

Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 470

Rear Defogger/

Heated Door Mirror Button ................... 131

Rear Entertainment System ..................... 251

Rear Seats (Folding Down)....... 146, 147, 148

Rearview Camera.............................. 369, 370

Rearview Mirror........................................ 135

Refueling................................................... 371

Fuel Gauge................................................ 80

Gasoline .......................................... 371, 464

Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 70

Regulations ............................... 357, 417, 467

Remote Transmitter ................................. 101

Replacement

Battery .................................................... 424

Bulbs ....................................................... 402

Fuses ............................... 454, 455, 456, 457

Tires ........................................................ 420

Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 410

Reporting Safety Defects......................... 469

Resetting a Trip Meter......................... 82, 87

Safe Driving ................................................ 23

Safety Check ............................................... 28

Safety Labels............................................... 66

Safety Message........................................... 21

Seat Belts .................................................... 29

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 33

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 31

Checking................................................... 36

Detachable Anchor.................................... 34

Fastening .................................................. 32

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 60

Pregnant Women ...................................... 35

Reminder .................................................. 30

Warning Indicator ............................... 30, 70

Seat Heaters.............................................. 162

Seats .......................................................... 137

Adjusting ................................................ 137

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 137

Front Seats .............................................. 137

Rear Seats ............................................... 146

Seat Heaters............................................ 162

Security System......................................... 118

Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 76 Home

QRG

Index

INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

484

Security System Alarm Indicator ................. 76

SEL/RESET Knob .................................... 81, 85

Select Lever ......................................... 14, 346

Operation .......................................... 14, 347

Releasing................................................. 447

Won’t Move ............................................ 447

Selecting a Child Seat ................................. 56

Selector Knob (Audio) ...................... 175, 216

Setting the Clock ........................................ 98

Shift Lever ........................................... 14, 346

Shift Lever Position Indicator............. 69, 347

Shifting (Transmission)............................. 346

Shoulder Anchor......................................... 33

Side Airbags ................................................ 44

Cutoff System............................................ 46

Off Indicator .............................................. 46

Side Curtain Airbags................................... 47

Snow Tires ................................................. 422

Spare Tire .......................................... 435, 465

Spark Plugs................................................ 464

Specifications ............................................ 464

Specified Fuel.................................... 371, 464

Speedometer............................................... 80

SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 40

Starting the Engine .................................. 342

Does Not Start ......................................... 444

Engine Switch Buzzer............................... 124

Jump Starting .......................................... 445

Steering Wheel ......................................... 134

Adjusting................................................. 134

Stopping.................................................... 364

Storage Compartment ............................. 154

Summer Tires............................................ 422

Sunglasses Holder..................................... 161

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 40

Switches

(Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 2, 3, 124

Synchronized Mode ................................. 167

System Message Indicator.......................... 73

Tachometer................................................. 80

Tailgate ..................................................... 110

Unable to Open....................................... 461

Temperature

Outside Temperature Display............... 84, 87

Temperature Gauge................................... 80

Temperature Sensor..................... 84, 87, 170

Time (Setting) ............................................. 98

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) ..................................................... 355

Indicator............................................ 74, 453

Tires........................................................... 414

Air Pressure ..................................... 415, 465

Checking and Maintaining ...................... 414

Inspection ............................................... 414

Labeling .................................................. 415

Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 435

Regulations ............................................. 417

Rotation .................................................. 421

Spare Tire........................................ 435, 465

Summer.................................................. 422

Tire Chains.............................................. 422

Wear Indicators....................................... 419

Winter .................................................... 422

Tools ......................................................... 434

Towing a Trailer....................................... 329

Equipment and Accessories..................... 333

Load Limits ............................................. 329

Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 339

Behind a Motorhome.............................. 339

Emergency.............................................. 459

TPMS

(Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ........ 355

Indicator ........................................... 74, 453

Transmission............................................. 346

Automatic............................................... 346

Fluid ....................................................... 399

Number .................................................. 466

Shift Lever Position Indicator ............. 69, 347

Trip Meter .................................... 82, 87, 177

Troubleshooting ...................................... 433

Blown Fuse ..................... 454, 455, 456, 457

Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 18

Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 19

Emergency Towing ................................. 459

Engine Won’t Start ................................. 444

Noise When Braking ................................. 19

Overheating............................................ 448

Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 435

Rear Door Won’t Open ..................... 18, 104

Select Lever Won’t Move ........................ 447

Home

QRG

Index

INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

485

Warning Indicators.................................... 68

Turn Signals.............................................. 125

Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 75

Unlocking the Doors................................ 101

USB Adapter Cable .......................... 172, 173

USB Flash Drives ....................................... 275

Valet Key .................................................. 100

Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 5

Vehicle Identification Number................ 466

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)................. 352

Off............................................................ 72

Off Button .............................................. 353

System...................................................... 72

Viscosity (Oil).................................... 392, 465

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) ................. 352

VTM (Variable Torque Management)

System..................................................... 354

Wallpaper................................................. 179

Warning and Information Messages ........ 78

Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 450

Warning Labels .......................................... 66

Warranties (Warranty Manual provided

separately) .............................................. 472

Watts ......................................................... 464

Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 419

Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 439

Window Washers...................................... 128

Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 401

Switch ..................................................... 128

Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 120

Windshield ................................................ 128

Cleaning.................................................. 431

Defrosting/Defogging .............................. 166

Washer Fluid ........................................... 401

Wiper Blades ........................................... 410

Wipers and Washers................................ 128

Winter Tires .............................................. 422

Snow Tires............................................... 422

Tire Chains .............................................. 422

Wipers and Washers................................. 128

Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 410

Front ....................................................... 128

Rear ........................................................ 129

WMA ................................. 193, 207, 226, 244

Worn Tires................................................. 414

XM® Radio................................................. 223

Home

QRG

Index

INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Honda 2013 Pilot Owners Manual